XC60 Owners Manual MY13 en-GB TP 15260

XC60 OWNERS MANUAL L:7:9>I>DC
DEAR VOLVO OWNER

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner's manual.
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
Table of contents
00 01 02
00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm
Important information................................. 6 Seatbelts .................................................. 16 Remote control key/key blade.................. 46
Volvo and the environment....................... 11 Airbags...................................................... 19 Battery replacement, remote control key/
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22 PCC*......................................................... 51
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 24 Keyless drive*............................................ 53
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 26 Locking/unlocking..................................... 56
WHIPS ...................................................... 27 Child safety locks...................................... 62
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS....... 29 Alarm*....................................................... 63
When the systems deploy ........................ 30
Safety mode.............................................. 31
Child safety............................................... 32
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents
03 04 05
03 Your driving environment 04 Driver support 05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Instruments and controls.......................... 68 DSTC – Stability and traction control sys- Menus and messages............................. 198
Volvo Sensus ........................................... 77 tem.......................................................... 146 Menu source MY CAR............................ 200
Key positions............................................ 78 Road sign information - RSI*.................. 148 Climate control........................................ 208
Seats......................................................... 80 Cruise control*........................................ 150 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-
Steering wheel.......................................... 85 Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 152 senger compartment heater*.................. 218
Lighting..................................................... 86 Distance Warning*.................................. 162 Additional heater*.................................... 221
Wipers and washing.................................. 98 City Safety™........................................... 165 Trip computer......................................... 222
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 101 Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Adapting driving characteristics............. 224
Pedestrian Protection*............................ 170 Comfort inside the passenger compart-
Compass*............................................... 106
Driver Alert System*................................ 178 ment........................................................ 225
Power panorama roof* ........................... 107
Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 179
Alcolock*................................................. 110
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 182
Starting the engine.................................. 114
Park assist syst*...................................... 185
Starting the engine – external battery..... 119
Park assist camera*................................ 188
Gearboxes............................................... 120
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 191
DRIVe Start/Stop*................................... 126
All-wheel drive – AWD*........................... 132
Foot brake............................................... 133
HDC Hill Descent Control....................... 135
Parking brake.......................................... 137
HomeLink *............................................ 141
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

Table of contents
06 07 08
06 Infotainment system 07 During your journey 08 Wheels and tyres
General information on infotainment...... 232 Recommendations during driving........... 292 General ................................................... 316
Radio....................................................... 244 Refuelling................................................ 295 Changing wheels ................................... 320
Media player........................................... 251 Fuel......................................................... 296 Tyre pressure ......................................... 323
External audio source via AUX/USB* Loading................................................... 299 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 324
input........................................................ 255 Cargo area.............................................. 302 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........ 325
Media Bluetooth* ................................. 258 Driving with a trailer................................ 305
Bluetooth handsfree*............................ 261 Towing and recovery.............................. 311
Voice recognition* mobile phone............ 270
TV*........................................................... 274
Remote control* ..................................... 278
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system* 280

Table of contents
09 10 11
09 Maintenance and service 10 Specifications 11 Alphabetical Index
Engine compartment............................... 332 Type designations................................... 372 Alphabetical Index.................................. 402
Lamps..................................................... 339 Dimensions and weights......................... 374
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 345 Engine specifications.............................. 377
Battery..................................................... 348 Engine oil................................................ 378
Fuses...................................................... 353 Fluids and lubricants............................... 380
Car care.................................................. 364 Fuel......................................................... 382
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-
sure ........................................................ 385
Electrical system..................................... 386
Type approval......................................... 387
Symbols in the display............................ 399
5
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Introduction dealer. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
A good way of getting to know your new car is sage texts on the information display (e.g.
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your Special texts Audio settings).
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to WARNING Decals
see how best to handle the car in different sit- The car contains different types of decal which
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
uations, and to make the best use of all the are designed to convey important information
injury.
car's features. Please pay attention to the in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
safety instructions contained in the manual. car have the following descending degree of
The specifications, design features and illus- IMPORTANT importance for the warning/information.
trations in this owner's manual are not binding. Important texts advise of a risk of material Warning for personal injury
We reserve the right to make modifications damage.
without prior notice.
© Volvo Car Corporation NOTE
Option NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
All types of option/accessory are marked with
ple.
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual Footnote
also describes options (factory fitted equip-
There is footnote information in the owner's
ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
manual that is located at the bottom of the
equipment).
page. This information is an addition to the text
The equipment described in the owner's man- that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- refers to text in a table then letters are used G031590
ferent equipment depending on adaptations instead of numbers for referral.

for the needs of different markets and national Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
or local laws and regulations. Message texts white text/image on black message field. Used
There are displays in the car that show text to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
messages. These text messages are high-

Introduction
warning is ignored, may result in serious per- Information Procedure lists

sonal injury or fatality. Procedures where action must be taken in a
Risk of property damage certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
G031593
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
G031592
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a

White ISO symbols and white text/image on movement when the reciprocal order is of
black message field. no relevance.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
black or blue warning field and message field. NOTE
step instructions then the different steps are
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, The labels shown in the owner's manual are numbered with normal numbers.
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage not provided as exact reproductions of
to property. those in the car. The purpose is to show Position lists
their approximate appearance and location Red circles containing a number are used
in the car. The information that applies to in overview images where different com-
your car in particular is available on the label
ponents are pointed out. The number
in question in your car.
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
7
Introduction
Bulleted lists includes details of the status and functionality is responsible that the information, which is
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of of various systems and modules in the vehicle transferred to Volvo during servicing and main-
points in the owner's manual. with regard to engine, throttle, steering and tenance, is stored and handled in a secure
brake systems, amongst other things. This manner and that the handling complies with
Example:
information may include details regarding the applicable legal requirements. For further infor-
• Coolant way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi- mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
• Engine oil cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
Accessories and extra equipment
To be continued the driver and passengers have used their
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- The incorrect connection and installation of
right when a section continues on the following tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers accessories can negatively affect the car's
page. for a certain length of time, but also as a result electrical system. Certain accessories only
of a collision or incident. This information may function when their associated software is
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
Recording data therefore recommends that you always con-
further develop and further enhance safety and
Your vehicle contains a number of computers quality and as long as there are legal require- tact an authorised Volvo workshop before
whose function is to continuously check and ments and other regulations that Volvo needs installing accessories which are connected to
monitor the vehicle's operation and function- to consider. or affect the electrical system.
ality. Some of the computers can record infor-
mation during normal driving if they detect an Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
bed information being disclosed to third parties Change of ownership for cars with
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
without the vehicle owner's consent. However, Volvo On Call*
event of a collision or incident. Parts of the
recorded information are required so that tech- due to national legislation and regulations Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the Volvo may be required to disclose such infor- consists of safety, security and comfort serv-
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and mation to authorities such as police authorities, ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and or others who may assert a legal right to have change of owner, it is very important that these
other regulations. In addition to this, the infor- access to it. services are discontinued so that the former
mation is used for research purposes by Volvo owner cannot access the services in the car.
To be able to read and interpret the information Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
in order to continually develop quality and recorded by the computers in the vehicle
safety, as the information can contribute to a CALL button in the car or contact an author-
requires special technical equipment that ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the
better understanding of the factors that cause Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
accidents and injuries. The information security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo On Call.

Introduction
Laser sensor exception of deviations in accordance with WARNING

This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
If any of these instructions are not followed
transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to then there is a risk of eye injury!
Radiation data for the laser sensor
follow the prescribed instructions when han-
The following table specifies the laser sensor's • Never look into the laser sensor (which
dling the laser sensor.
physical data. emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
The following two labels in English are fitted at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
directly on the laser sensor unit: Maximum pulse energy 2.64 ¦J magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar opti-
Maximum average output 45 mW cal instruments.
Pulse duration 33 ns • Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sen-
Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° sor's spare parts must only be carried
cal) out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
ommend an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
• To avoid exposure to harmful radiation,
do not carry out any readjustments or
maintenance other than those specified
here.
The upper label in the figure describes the laser

• The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
beam's classification: laser sensor.
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser • Do not remove the laser sensor (this
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M includes removing the lenses). A
laser product. removed laser sensor does not fulfil
The lower label in the figure describes the laser laser class 3B as per standard IEC
beam's physical data: 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe
and therefore entails a risk of injury.
• IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand-
ards for laser product design with the
9
Introduction
• The laser sensor's connector must be

unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
• The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's con-
nector is plugged in.
• The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in posi-
tion II and also with the engine switched
off (see page 78 on key positions).
For more information on the laser sensor, see

page 165.
Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
To be able to read the QR code, you need a QR
code reader, which is available as an add-on
for a number of mobile phones. A QR code
reader can be downloaded from the App Store
or Android Market.
QR code
10
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- Fuel consumption many cases the exhaust emissions are well
ration's core values which influence all opera- Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption below the applicable standards.
tions. We also believe that our customers share in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
our consideration for the environment. consumption generally results in lower emis- Clean air in the passenger compartment
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
Your Volvo complies with strict international and pollen from entering the passenger com-
environmental standards and is also manufac- It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- partment via the air intake.
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- sumption. For more information read under the
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- heading, Reducing environmental impact. A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
ration has global ISO certification, which rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
includes the environmental standard ISO Efficient emission control ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
14001 covering all factories and several of our Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- side.
other units. We also set requirements for our cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that The system consists of an electronic sensor
partners so that they work systematically with encompasses a clean interior environment as and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
environmental issues. well as highly efficient emission control. In tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction
Volvo and the environment
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the Recycling
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. engine when stationary for longer periods. As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, Pay attention to local regulations. important that the car is recycled in an envi-
queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead. ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone • Perform service and maintenance in car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon accordance with the owner's manual's is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
filter. instructions - follow the Service and War- referral to a certified/approved recycling
ranty Booklet's recommended intervals. facility.
Interior
• If the car is equipped with an engine block
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- heater*, use it before starting from cold - it The owner's manual and the
sant and comfortable, even for people with improves starting capacity and reduces environment
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. wear in cold weather and the engine rea-
Extreme attention has been given to choosing The Forest Stewardship Council symbol
ches normal operating temperature more shows that the paper pulp in this publication
environmentally-compatible materials. quickly, which lowers consumption and
comes from FSC certified forests or other
reduces emissions.
Volvo workshops and the environment controlled sources.
Regular maintenance creates the conditions • High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
tance 4 times.
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte- • Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
way in which our workshops are designed in workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
environment. Our workshop staff have the
mended.
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care. Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
Reducing environmental impact durability is extended. For more information
You can easily help reduce environmental and further advice, see the pages 292 and
impact - here are a few tips: 382.

Introduction
13
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16
Airbags.................................................................................................... 19
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 26
WHIPS .................................................................................................... 27
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS..................................................... 29
When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 30
Safety mode............................................................................................ 31
Child safety............................................................................................. 32

SAFETY
01 Safety
01 Seatbelts
General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does
not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with- WARNING
drawn: Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact an
• if it is pulled out too quickly authorised Volvo workshop.
• during braking and acceleration If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
• if the car leans heavily. load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some
Make sure that you: of the protective characteristics of the seat-
• do not use clips or anything else that can belt may have been lost, even if it appears
Heavy braking can have serious consequences prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly to be undamaged. In addition, replace the
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The
passengers use their seatbelts. • ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
new seatbelt must be type-approved and
caught on anything intended for installation in the same position
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
• the hip strap must be positioned low down as the replaced seatbelt.
body so it can provide maximum protection. (not over the abdomen)
Do not lean the backrest too far back. The
seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal • tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
seating position.
shoulder.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press- WARNING
ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked. belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
seat1.
1 Certain markets.
16
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
Seatbelts and pregnancy and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi- Rear seat
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
ble between abdomen and steering wheel. subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after press-
ing the indicator stalk's OK button.
G020998 • Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message on
The seatbelt should always be worn during
the information display along with the
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
audio/visual signal. The warning stops
G017726
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
over the shoulder then be routed between the also be acknowledged manually by press-
breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten ing the OK button.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual The message on the information display show-
and as low as possible under the abdomen. – reminder. The audio reminder is speed ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
It must never be allowed to ride upward. dependent, and in some cases time depend- able. Press the OK button to see stored mes-
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof sages.
that it fits as close to the body as possible. In console and the combined instrument panel.
addition, check that there are no twists in the Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
seatbelt. reminder system.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
``
17
01 Safety
01 Seatbelts
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-
sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for the occu-
pants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not func-
tion as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
18
01 Safety
Airbags 01
Warning symbol on the combined As well as the warning symbol, a message may
instrument panel appear on the information display in appropri-
ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,
the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo
recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G018666
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot.
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates
trol key is in key position II. The symbol clears
when compressed. When this occurs, smoke
after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
system is fault-free.
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
G018665
deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
WARNING a second.
If the warning symbol for the airbag system Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- WARNING
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indi- Volvo recommends that you contact an
cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
tem, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault Defective work in the airbag system could
in the system. Volvo recommends that you cause malfunction and result in serious per-
contact an authorised Volvo workshop sonal injury.
immediately.
19
01 Safety
01 Airbags
NOTE Passenger airbag The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
The sensors react differently depending on ger side. It is folded up into a compartment
the course of the collision and whether or above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
not the seatbelts on the driver and passen-
ger side are used. AIRBAG.
It is therefore possible that only one (or

none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- WARNING
sion. The airbag system senses the force of The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
the collision on the car and adapts accord- is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
ingly so that one or more airbags are diminish the protection provided by the air-
deployed. bag in the event of a collision.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
to the collision force to which the vehicle is deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
subjected. Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- possible with their feet on the floor and
hand drive car. backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must
be secured.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
WARNING
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- Do not put objects in front of or above the
ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked dashboard where the passenger airbag is
AIRBAG. located.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision. Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-
hand drive car.
20
01 Safety
Airbags 01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
21
01 Safety
01 Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS* WARNING Activating/deactivating

General information If the car is equipped with a front passenger
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the
airbag will always be activated.
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating. WARNING
Key switch off/switch Never place a child in a child seat or on a
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is located on the passenger end of the instru- is activated and the symbol in the roof
ment panel and is accessible when the pas- console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
senger door is open (see under the heading
Switch location.
below, Activating/deactivating).
WARNING The airbag is activated. With the switch in
Check that the switch is in the required posi- this position, persons taller than 140 cm
tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con- Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- can sit in the front passenger seat, but
trol key's key blade be used to change posi- senger seat if the message in the roof con- never children in a child seat or on a
tion. sole (see page 23) indicates that the air-
booster cushion.
bag is deactivated and if the warning sym-
For information on the key blade, see bol for the airbag system is also displayed The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
page 50. in the combined instrument panel. This indi- in this position, children in a child seat or
cates that there has been a severe malfunc- on a booster cushion can sit in the front
WARNING tion. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. passenger seat, but never persons taller
Volvo recommends that you contact an
Failure to follow the advice given above than 140 cm.
authorised Volvo workshop.
could endanger the life of passengers in the
car.

01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
WARNING Activated airbag Deactivated airbag

Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat 2
when the airbag is activated. This applies to

everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated. 2
G017800
G017724
endanger life.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated. deactivated.
NOTE A warning symbol in the roof console indicates A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
When the remote control key is in key posi- that the airbag for the front passenger seat is sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
tion II the warning symbol for the airbag is activated (see preceding illustration). senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-
displayed on the combined instrument tration).
panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions for the remote control key, see
page 78.

01 Safety
01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)
Side airbag WARNING Location

• Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
• Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
G032949
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of of the side airbags.
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS • The side airbag is a supplement to the
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the Child seats and side airbags
chest area and the hip and are an important The protection provided by the car to children
part of the SIPS. seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
side airbags are located in the front seat back- on the front passenger seat provided that the
rests. car does not have an activated1 passenger air-
bag.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.
24
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
25
01 Safety
01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the the top edge of the door windows. Other-
headlining along both sides of the roof and wise, the intended protection of the inflat-
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer able curtain, which is concealed in the head-
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the lining, may be compromised.
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
WARNING
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision. The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
26
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
Protection against whiplash injury – The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Correct seating position
WHIPS sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- For the best possible protection, the driver and
cially designed head restraints in the front front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end the seat with as little space as possible
collision, where the angle and speed of the col- between the head and the head restraint.
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence. Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
WARNING driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that WARNING
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
WHIPS system and child seats/booster rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
cushions function of the WHIPS system.
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
27
01 Safety
01 WHIPS
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may collision.
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
28
01 Safety
Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS 01
Function
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)
has been designed to reduce the risk of the car
overturning and to provide the best possible
protection in the event of such an accident.
The system consists of a stabiliser system,
Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the
risk of overturning, for example, during sudden
evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.
The RSC system uses a sensor which registers
changes in the car's lateral inclination angle.
This information is used to calculate the risk of
the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC
system engages, engine torque is lowered and
one or more wheels are braked until the car has
regained its stability.
For more information on the DSTC system, see
page 146 .
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC
system improves the car's road safety, but
this must not be taken as a reason to
increase speed. Always follow the usual
precautions for safe driving.
29
01 Safety
01 When the systems deploy
When the systems deploy If the airbags have deployed, the following is WARNING
recommended:
System Triggered Never drive with deployed airbags. They
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends can make steering difficult. Other safety
Seatbelt tensioner, In the event of a that you have it conveyed to an authorised systems may also be damaged. The smoke
front seat frontal collision, Volvo workshop. Do not drive with and dust created when the airbags are
and/or side-impact deployed airbags. deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
collision, and/or injury after intensive exposure. In case of
• Volvo recommends that you engage an irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
rear-end collision authorised Volvo workshop to handle the deployment sequence and airbag fabric
and/or overturning replacement of components in the car's may cause friction and skin burns.
safety systems.
Seatbelt tensioner, In a frontal collision
rear seat and/or side-impact • Always contact a doctor.
accident and/or
overturning NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA deployed only once during a collision.
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact
accident WARNING
Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a side The airbag control module is located in the
impact and/or over- centre console. If the centre console is
turning and/or some drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
frontal collisions nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli- Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
WHIPS sion you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-
lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such
as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the
car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different
safety systems of the car are activated.
30
01 Safety
Safety mode 01
Driving after a collision effect that the ignition is on, press the start WARNING
button. Then close the door and reinsert the
remote control key. The car's electronics will Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
now try to reset themselves to normal mode. restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is dis-
Then try to start the car. played. Leave the car at once.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv-
WARNING
ice used instead. Even if the car appears to be If the car is in safety mode it must not be
driveable, hidden damage may make the car towed. It must be transported from its loca-
impossible to control once moving. tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor-
ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
If the car is involved in a collision, the text See manual has been reset, the car can be
Safety mode See manual may appear on the moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
information display. This means that the car Do not move the car further than necessary.
has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
WARNING
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
one of the safety systems, or the brake system. electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
Attempting to start the car injury or the car not functioning as normal.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. Volvo recommends that you engage an
There must be no smell of fuel either. authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
If everything seems normal and you have mode See manual has been displayed.
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
31
01 Safety
01 Child safety
Children should sit comfortably and NOTE WARNING

safely
In the event of questions when fitting child Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- safety products, contact the manufacturer the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
facing child seats until as late an age as pos- for clearer instructions. springs or the rails and beams under the
sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age. Child seats Look in the installation instructions for the child
The position of a child in the car and the choice seat for the correct fitting.
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 33. Location of child seats
You may place:
NOTE
• a child seat/booster cushion on the pas-
Regulations regarding the placement of senger seat, provided the passenger air-
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply. bag is not activated1.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
G020739
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
to sit on the knee of a passenger. Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If
a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
booster cushions & attachment devices) which NOTE
airbag deploys.
is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- When using child safety products it is
vo's child safety equipment provides you with important to read the installation instruc-
optimum conditions for your child to travel tions included.
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
32
01 Safety
Child safety 01
WARNING WARNING Label Airbag

Never place a child in a child seat or on a Booster cushions/child seats with steel
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag braces or some other design that could rest
(SRS) is activated. on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated. Do not allow the upper section of the child The label becomes visible when the passenger
seat to rest against the windscreen. door is opened; see the illustration on page 22.
endanger life.
Recommended child seats2

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag)
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
max 10 kg
ISOFIX fixture system.
Group 0+ Type approval: E5 03301146
max 13 kg (L)
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the
max 10 kg
car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt.
Group 0+ Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146
max 13 kg (U) (U) (U)
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
33
01 Safety
01 Child safety
bag)
Group 0 Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
max 10 kg
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps.
Group 0+ tective cushion between the child seat
Type approval: E5 03135 Type approval: E5 03135
and the dashboard.
max 13 kg (L) (L)
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Group 0 Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally
approved. approved. approved.
max 10 kg
(U) (U) (U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat

(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
9-18 kg
facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps.
(L) (L)
34
01 Safety
Child safety 01
bag)
Group 1 Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) -
9-18 kg
car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps.
tective cushion between the child seat
and the dashboard.
(L) (L)
(L)
Group 1 Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
9-18 kg
and straps.
(L)
Group 1 Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally
approved. approved. approved.
9-18 kg
(U) (U) (U)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-
15-25 kg
facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192
(L) (L) (L)
``
35
01 Safety
01 Child safety
bag)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-
15-25 kg
facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt.
(L) (L)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest
(Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
15-36 kg
(UF) (UF) (UF)
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without
backrest (Booster Cushion with and backrest (Booster Cushion with and backrest (Booster Cushion with and
15-36 kg
without backrest). without backrest). without backrest).
(UF) (UF) (UF)
36
01 Safety
Child safety 01
bag)
Group 2/3 Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a fac-
15-36 kg
tory fitted option.
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
``
37
01 Safety
01 Child safety
Integrated two-stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Stage 1
cushions* provide optimum safety. In combination with
the seatbelt they are approved for children who
weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at
least 95 cm in height.
Check before driving that:
• the integrated 2-stage booster cushion is
correctly set (see table page 38) and in
locked position
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
• the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder (see preced-
ing illustrations) Pull the handle forward and up in order to
Correct position, the seatbelt should be posi-
tioned in on the shoulder. release the booster cushion.
• the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro-
tection.
For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-
ion's two levels, see pages 38–39.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion

The integrated booster cushion can be folded
up into two stages. How many stages the cush-
ion should be folded up depends on the child's
weight.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must
Press the booster cushion backwards to
not be below the shoulder. lock.

01 Safety
Child safety 01
Stage 2 Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge the booster cushion from the upper stage to
and press it back against the backrest to lock. the lower stage.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
cations or additions to the booster cushion.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in con-
junction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protec-
Start from the lower stage. Press the but- tion. The booster cushion must also be
ton. replaced if it is heavily worn.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster cush-
ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be
reset by being fully folded into the seat
cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low-
ering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion

Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in the
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust
39
01 Safety
01 Child safety
Press down with your hand in the centre of ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Consequently, there is a size classification for
the cushion in order to lock it. child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
WARNING child seat (see the following table).
If the instructions regarding the two-stage

booster cushion are not followed then this Size Description
could cause serious injury to a child in the class
event of an accident.
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
IMPORTANT
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. facing child seat
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering. B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
facing child seat
are concealed behind the lower section of the
NOTE rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. C Full size, rear-facing child
The booster cushion must be lowered first The location of the mounting points is indicated seat
when lowering the backrest. by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
D Reduced size, rear-facing
ceding illustration).
child seat
Child safety locks, rear doors Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points. E Rear-facing infant seat
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles Always follow the manufacturer's installation F Transverse infant seat, left-
can be blocked from opening from the inside. instructions when connecting a child seat to hand
For more information, see page 62. the ISOFIX mounting points.
G Transverse infant seat, right-
Size classes hand
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
40
01 Safety
Child safety 01
WARNING NOTE NOTE

Never place a child in the passenger seat if If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- Volvo recommends that you contact an
the car is equipped with an activated airbag. cation then the car model must be included authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
on the child seat's vehicle list. tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
41
01 Safety
01 Child safety
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA

(IUL)
B1 X OKA
(IUL)
A X OKA
(IUL)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
42
01 Safety
Child safety 01
Upper mounting points for child seats NOTE

For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
The car is equipped with upper mounting drawn through the hole in the head restraint
points for certain front-facing child seats. leg before they are tensioned at the attach-
These mounting points are located on the rear ment point.
of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with
folding head restraints on the outer seats.
43
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 46
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 51
Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 53
Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 56
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 62
Alarm*...................................................................................................... 63

LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
General Loss of a remote control key Indicator for locking/unlocking

The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys If you lose a remote control key then a new one When the car is locked or unlocked using the
02 can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised remote control key, the direction indicators
or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They
are used to start the car and for locking and Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain- confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
unlocking. ing remote control keys must then be taken to performed.
the workshop. The code of the missing remote
Additional remote control keys can be ordered control key must be erased from the system as
• Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
- up to 6 can be programmed and used for the are folded2 in.
a theft prevention measure.
same car. • Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
The current number of keys registered to the rors are folded2 out.
The remote control key contains a removable car can be checked in the menu system MY
key blade made of metal. The visible section is After locking the indication is only given if all
CAR under Information Number of keys.
available in two versions so that it is possible locks have been activated once the doors have
to distinguish between the remote control For a description of the menu system, see been closed.
keys. page 200.
Selecting the function
The PCC has increased functionality com- Key memory1 – door mirrors and driver's Different options for indicating locking/unlock-
pared with the remote control key. The contin- seat ing with light can be set in the car's menu sys-
uation of this chapter describes the functions The settings are automatically connected to tem, see page 200.
available in both the PCC and the remote con- each respective remote control key, see pages
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
trol key. 81 and 103.
Settings Car settings Light settings
The function can be activated/deactivated in and select Door lock confirmation light and/
WARNING the menu system MY CAR under Settings or Unlock confirmation light.
If there are children in the car: Car settings Car key memory.
Remember to switch off the supply to the Immobiliser
For a description of the menu system, see Each remote control key has a unique code.
power windows and sunroof by removing
the remote control key if the driver leaves page 200. The car can only be started with the correct
the car. For cars with the Keyless drive system, see remote control key with the correct code.
page 53.
1 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

2 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
46
02 Locks and alarm
The following error messages in the combined Message Specification Functions

instrument panel's information display are rela-
ted to the electronic immobiliser: Insert car key Error when reading 02
the remote control
key during starting -
Remove the key
from the ignition
switch, press it in
again and make a
new start attempt.
Car key not found Error reading the

remote control key
during starting - Try
Remote control key, standard version.
to start again.
Locking
If the error persists:
Insert the remote Unlocking
control key into the
ignition switch and Approach light duration
try to start again. Tailgate
Immobiliser Try Error in immobiliser Panic function
start again system during star-
ting. If the error per-
sists: Contact a
workshop - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
For starting the car, see page 114.
``
47
02 Locks and alarm
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
windows simultaneously. automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
02
The function can be changed from unlocking Range
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv- The remote control key's functions have a
er's door only with one press of the button and, range of about 20 m from the car.
after a further press of the button - within 10
seconds - unlocking the remaining doors. If the car does not verify a button being pressed
- move closer and try again.
The function can be changed in the menu sys-
tem MY CAR under Settings Car settings NOTE
Lock settings Doors unlock with both
The remote control key functions can be
the alternatives All doors and Driver door, disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car then all. For a description of the menu system,
Communicator. buildings, topographical conditions etc. The
see page 200. car can always be locked/unlocked using
Information the key blade, see page 50.
Approach light duration – Used to switch
Function buttons on the car's lighting at a distance. For more
information, see page 94. If the remote control key is removed from the
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate car when the engine is running or key position
while the alarm is activated. Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm I or II is active (see page 78) and if all doors
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all for the tailgate only. On cars with power tail- are closed, then a warning message is shown
the windows and sunroof* simultaneously. gate* the tailgate is opened after the button is in the information display and an audible
kept depressed. For more information, see reminder signal sounds at the same time.
page 58.
WARNING The warning message clears and the audio
If the sunroof and windows are closed using Panic function – Used to attract attention reminder signal stops when the remote control
the remote control key, check that no one is in an emergency. key is brought back to the car after:
in danger of getting hands caught. • The remote control key has been inserted
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti- in the ignition switch
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail- vate the direction indicators and the horn. • Speed exceeds 30 km/h
gate while the alarm is deactivated. The function can be turned off with the same • the OK button has been pressed.
button once it has been active for at least

02 Locks and alarm
Unique PCC functions* If any of the other buttons are pressed Red continuous light – the alarm has been
during this time then the reading is inter- triggered since the car was locked.
rupted. 02
Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
cator lamps – The alarm was triggered less
NOTE than 5 minutes ago.
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- Range PCC
nates with repeated use of the information The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has trav- tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other
elled around on the PCC), contact a work- functions up to about 100 m.
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- If the car does not verify a button being pressed
ommended. - move closer and try again.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Indicator lamps display information in accord- NOTE
Communicator. ance with the following illustration:
Information button The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
Indicator lamps buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Using the information button enables access to

certain information from the car via the indica- Out of PCC range
tor lamps. If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
Using the information button was last left in is shown, without the light trav-
– Press the information button . elling around on the PCC.
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
mately 7 seconds and the light travels only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
around on the PCC. This indicates that that shows correct status.
information from the car has been read.
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.

02 Locks and alarm
NOTE • the airbag for front passenger seat Unlocking doors with the key blade
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated, If central locking cannot be activated with the
02 If no indicator lamps illuminate when see page 22. remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
the information button is used within range
Removing the key blade discharged - then the driver's door can be
then this may be because the last commu-
nication between the PCC and the car was opened as follows:
disrupted by surrounding radio waves, 1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade
buildings, topographical conditions etc. in the door handle's lock cylinder.
See also the illustration and further infor-
Detachable key blade mation see page 54.
A remote control key contains a detachable

NOTE
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried When the door has been unlocked using the
out. key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
ommended when ordering new key blades.
remote control key in the ignition switch.
Key blade functions At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards. For a car with the Keyless system, see
Using the remote control key's detachable key page 54.
blade: Attaching the key blade
• the driver's door can be opened manually Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key.
the remote control key, see page 54.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety pointed up and lower the key blade into its
locks can be activated/deactivated, see slot.
page 62.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
• access to the glovebox can be blocked. hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
in.

02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
Replacing the battery Battery replacement

The batteries should be replaced if: Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with 02
• the information symbol is illuminated and regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries. Remove control key (1 battery)
and/or 1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within PCC* (2 batteries)
20 metres from the car. 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
Opening
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the up.
side.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
At the same time pull the key blade and finally install a second new battery with
straight out backwards. the (+) side down.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the Battery type

hole behind the spring-loaded catch and Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V
gently prize the remote control key up. - one in the remote control key and two in the
PCC.
NOTE
Assembly
Turn the remote control key over with the 1. Press the remote control key together.
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
teries falling out when it is opened. 2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
IMPORTANT
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals hear a "click" when the key blade is locked
with your fingers, as this could damage their in.
functionality.

02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
IMPORTANT
02 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally-friendly way.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Keyless lock and ignition system (only the car door handle or tailgate. This means that reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
PCC1) the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door all PCCs with great care.
must have the PCC with him or her. It is not 02
General possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is IMPORTANT
on the opposite side of the car.
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-
cate the range covered by the system's anten-
Interference to PCC function
nas.
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the fere with the keyless drive system.
engine is running or key position I or II is active
(see page 78) and if all doors are closed, then NOTE
a warning message is shown in the information
display and an audible reminder signal sounds Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
at the same time. phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15
cm.
The warning message clears and the audio
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with- back to the car after: the PCC and the key blade as a remote control
out the need for a key. You simply have to have • a door has been opened and closed key, see page 47.
the PCC with you. The system makes it easier
and more convenient to open the car, e.g.
• the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
when your hands are full. • the OK button has been pressed.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless Handling the PCC safely
function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the
page 46. car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
PCC range
However, if someone breaks into the car,
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
1 Personal Car Communicator, see page 49.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Locking Unlocking 1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight

Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a up into the hole on the underside of the
02 door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- door handle/cover - do not prize.
sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- > The plastic cover loosens automatically
gate as normal. by means of the torque when the blade
Unlocking with the key blade is pushed straight up and into the open-
ing.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin-
der and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles. When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
lock button on one of the door handles on the in the ignition switch, see page 64.
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover. Key memory2 – driver's seat and door
before the car can be locked - otherwise the If central locking cannot be activated with the mirrors
car is not locked. PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then PCC memory function
the left-hand front door can be opened with the If several people each with a PCC approach the
NOTE
PCC's detachable key blade (see page 50) car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are
On cars with automatic transmission, the implemented for the person who opens the
gear selector must be set in the P position To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also driver's door.
– otherwise the car cannot be locked or the
alarm armed. done with the key blade: After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-
2 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
B shall drive, the settings can be changed in Antenna location WARNING

three ways:
People with pacemaker operations should 02
• Standing by the driver's door, or sitting not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
behind the steering wheel, person B system's antennae with their pacemaker.
presses their PCC's unlock button, see This is to prevent interference between the
page 47. pacemaker and the keyless system.
• Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 81.
• Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 81 and 103.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indi-
The keyless system has a number of integrated
cating in the menu system MY CAR which antennae located around the car:
doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there Tailgate, by wiper motor
select between All doors unlock, Any door, Door handle, left rear
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
For a description of the menu system, see the floor
page 200.
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.

02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
From the outside WARNING From the inside

The remote control key can lock/unlock all
02 Be aware of the risk of being locked in the Central locking
doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different car when it is locked from the outside using
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see the remote control key - it is then not pos-
"Unlocking with the remote control key" page sible to open any of the doors from the
48. inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
In order that the lock sequence can be action.
vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any
of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then
it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated Automatic relocking
only when it/they are closed. With the Key- If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
less* system all the doors and tailgate must be within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
closed. again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see page 63.)
NOTE Central locking.
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
control key in the car. or unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on either front door.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the • Press one side of the button to lock -
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
the other side to unlock.
charged - lock or unlock the driver's door with
the detachable key blade, see page 50. Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
NOTE different ways:
Remember that the alarm is triggered when • Press the central locking button .
the door is opened after being unlocked
with the key blade - the alarm is switched Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
off when the remote control key is inserted open all the side windows* simultaneously.
into the ignition switch.

02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
• Pull the door handle once and release - the Glovebox Tailgate
door is unlocked. Pull the door handle
again to open the door. Manual opening 02
Locking
• Press the central locking button after
the front doors have been closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows and the sunroof*
simultaneously.
All doors can also be individually locked man-
ually with their lock buttons - the door in ques-
tion must then be closed.
Global opening The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked

using the remote control key's detachable key Rubber plate with electrical contact.
Press and hold the central locking button
blade. For information on the key blade, see The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win- page 50.
dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly To open:
ventilate the passenger compartment during Locking the glovebox: 1. Push down gently on the rubberised pres-
hot weather. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock sure plate under the outer handle - the lock
cylinder. is released.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati- Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. 2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
cally when the car starts to move. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked the tailgate.
position.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings Pull out the key blade.
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
• Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
door locking. For a description of the menu order.
system, see page 200.
``

02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
IMPORTANT armed. The alarm's level and movement sen- Locking with the remote control key
sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate – Press the remote control key's button for
02 • Minimal force is required to release the are disconnected. locking, , see page 47.
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel. The doors remain locked and armed. > If the car is equipped with an alarm* the
alarm indicator on the instrument panel
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber • The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift closed - press lightly on the rubberised starts to flash, which means that the
the handle. Using too much force may pressure plate under the outer handle and alarm is armed.
damage the electrical contact for the lift the tailgate.
rubber panel. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes Power operated tailgate*
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Unlocking the car from inside
G031965
NOTE
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and Consider the roof height when using elec-
To unlock the tailgate: trical operation. Do not use electrical oper-
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key's button. – Press the lighting panel button (1). ation of the tailgate under a low roof height,
see under the heading "Interrupt opening/
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm > The tailgate is unlocked and can be closing of tailgate".
indicator on the instrument panel stops to opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
show that alarm for the whole of the car is not locked from the inside).

02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
NOTE Pinch protection • Long press on the button in the lighting

If something with sufficient resistance prevents panel - hold the button depressed until the
• If the system has been operating con- the tailgate from opening/closing then the tailgate starts to open. 02
tinuously for a long time, it is switched
off to avoid overload. It can be used
pinch protection is activated. • Long press on the button on the remote
control key - hold the button depressed
again after about 2 minutes. • During opening - power tailgate operation until the tailgate starts to open.
is deactivated and the tailgate is disen-
• If the battery has been discharged or
gaged. • Push down gently on the rubberised pres-
disconnected then the tailgate must be
sure plate under the outer handle.
opened and closed again to reset the • When closing - the tailgate stops and
system. backs off from the obstacle a couple of Closing the tailgate
centimetres.
Close using this button on the tailgate
Programmable max. opening or manually.
Tailgate maximum opening position can be
WARNING
• Press the button – the tailgate closes auto-
programmed. Can be used for e.g. low roof Pay attention to the risk of crushing when matically.
height in a garage. Proceed as follows: opening/closing. Before starting to open/
close; make sure that there is nobody close Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate
• Open the tailgate manually, hold it in the to the tailgate as a crushing injury could This can be done four ways (of which
desired position and give the button on the have serious consequences.
tailgate one long press (at least 3 seconds) three involve this button):
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
and then release the tailgate - the pro- • Press the lighting panel button
gramming is complete.
Opening the tailgate
• Press the remote control key button
• To clear the programming - move the tail- • Press the tailgate's button
gate manually to a higher position. The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but- • Press the rubberised pressure plate
Snow and wind ton): beneath the outside handle.
If the tailgate is forced down by something just - The tailgate's movement is interrupted and it
when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or stops.
strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to
lower, then it is closed automatically.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Manual tailgate operation WARNING the deadlocks function can be temporarily

The system is disengaged if the opening/clos- switched off. This is carried out as follows:
02 ing sequence is interrupted in accordance with Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in 1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
the preceding section. order to avoid the risk of anyone being Settings Car settings Reduced
• The tailgate can then be operated man- locked in. Guard (for a detailed description of the
ually. menu system, see page 200).
Temporary deactivation 2. Select Activate once.
Deadlocks*1 > The instrument panel display shows the
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and message Reduced guard See
door handles are mechanically disengaged, manual and the deadlocks function is
which prevents doors being opened from the switched off when the car is locked.
inside.
or
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately – Select Ask when exiting.
10 second delay after the doors have been > Each time the engine is switched off the
locked. centre console display screen shows
the message Activate Reduced Guard
NOTE until engine has started again? fol-
Active menu options are indicated with a cross. lowed by the alternatives Confirm with
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is OK and Cancel with EXIT.
MY CAR
deactivated. If the deadlocks function shall be switched
OK MENU off
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock TUNE knob control – Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
state with the remote control key. The front left that the alarm's movement and tilt detec-
door can also be unlocked with the detachable EXIT
tors* are switched off at the same time, see
key blade. If someone is going to stay in the car but the page 64.)
doors must be locked from the outside, then
1 Only in combination with alarm.

02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
> The next time the engine is started, the

system is reset to zero and the instru-
ment panel display shows the message 02
Full guard at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors are re-engaged.
If the locking system shall not be changed
– Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
• Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
• If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
61
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual blocking of the rear doors NOTE 1. Start the engine or choose a key position
The child safety locks prevent children from higher than 0.
02
opening a rear door from the inside.
• A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors 2. Press the button in the driver's door control
simultaneously. panel.
• Cars with an electric child safety lock do > The information display shows the mes-
not have a manual child lock. sage Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates - the locks
are active.
Electrical locking of the rear doors* When the electric child safety lock is active
and power windows then the rear:
• windows can only be opened with the driv-
er's door control panel
G021077
• doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine
The child safety locks are located on the trailing is switched off - if the child safety locks are
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible activated at engine shutdown, the function will
when the doors are open. remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
– Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob - see page 50.
Control panel driver's door.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside. The child safety locks can be activated/deac-
tivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see
The door can be opened from both the
page 78. Activation/deactivation can be per-
outside and the inside.
formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
General NOTE Alarm indicator

Activated alarm is triggered if:
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in 02
• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
• a movement is detected in the passenger tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered
compartment (if fitted with a movement if the car is left with a window or the sunroof
detector*) open or if the passenger compartment
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted heater is used.
with a tilt detector*) To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
• the battery's cable is disconnected when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a porta-
• the siren is disconnected. ble electric heater) shall be used - direct the
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- airflow from the air vents so that they are not
mation display shows a message. In which pointing upwards in the passenger com-
case, contact a workshop - an authorised partment. A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
Volvo workshop is recommended. the alarm system's status:
NOTE • LED not lit – Alarm not armed
One of the detectors for the alarm is located • The LED flashes once every other second
under the cup holder in the centre console. – Alarm is armed
This detector is sensitive for metals. • The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal alarm (and until the remote control key is
objects in the centre console's cup holder inserted in the ignition switch and key posi-
as such objects could accidentally trigger tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-
the alarm. gered.
Arming the alarm

NOTE – Press the remote control key lock button.
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts Deactivate the alarm
could affect the terms of insurance. – Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Deactivating a triggered alarm Reduced alarm level

– Press the remote control key unlock button To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
02 or insert the remote control key in the igni- e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
tion switch. transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily
deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
Other alarm functions The procedure is the same as with the tempo-
rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 60.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- switch.
armed. The car is relocked at the same time. > The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the 3. Start the engine.
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis-
Alarm signals
armed and the engine started as follows: When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade - see page 54. • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indica- battery and works independently of the car
tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds. battery.
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.

02 Locks and alarm
02
65
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 68
Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 77
Key positions.......................................................................................... 78
Seats....................................................................................................... 80
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 85
Lighting................................................................................................... 86
Wipers and washing................................................................................ 98
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 101
Compass*.............................................................................................. 106
Power panorama roof* ......................................................................... 107
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 110
Starting the engine................................................................................ 114
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 119
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 120
DRIVe Start/Stop*................................................................................. 126
All-wheel drive – AWD*......................................................................... 132
Foot brake............................................................................................. 133
HDC Hill Descent Control..................................................................... 135
Parking brake........................................................................................ 137
HomeLink *.......................................................................................... 141

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
Left-hand drive.
68
Function Page Function Page

Menus and messages, 87, Control for infotainment 200, 236
direction indicators, 92, 198, and menu control
main/dipped beam, trip 222
computer Control panel for climate 208
control 03
Cruise control 150, 152
Gear selector 120
Horn, airbags 20, 85
Controls for active chas- 224
Combined instrument 71, 75 sis (Four-C)*
panel
Wipers and washing 98, 99
Menu, audio and phone 200,
control 234, 261, Steering wheel adjust- 85
236 ment
START/STOP ENGINE 114 Bonnet opener 332

button
Parking brake 137
Ignition switch 78
Headlamp control, 57, 86,
Display for infotainment 200, opener for fuel filler flap 295
and menus 237, 236 and tailgate
Door handle – Seat adjustment* 81
Control panel 56, 62,

101, 103
Hazard warning flashers 92
``

03
Right-hand drive.
70
Function Page Function Page Information displays
Display for infotainment 200, Headlamp control, 57, 86,

and menus 237, 236 opener for fuel filler flap 295
and tailgate
Ignition switch 78
Parking brake 137 03
START/STOP ENGINE 114
button Bonnet opener 332
Cruise control 150, 152 Steering wheel adjust- 85

ment
Combined instrument 71, 75
panel Menus and messages, 87,
direction indicators, 92, 198,
Horn, airbags 20, 85 main/dipped beam, trip 222 The combined instrument panel's information
computer displays show information on some of the car's
Menu, audio and phone 200, functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer
control 234, 261, Gear selector 120 and messages. The information is shown with
236 text and symbols.
Controls for active chas- 224
,,, There are further descriptions under the func-
sis (Four-C)*
tions that use the information displays.
Wipers and washing 98, 99
Control panel for climate 208
Door handle – control
Control for infotainment 200, 236

Control panel 56, 62,
and menu control
101, 103
Hazard warning flashers 92
Seat adjustment* 81
``

Meters Indicator and warning symbols If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
03
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
Meters in the combined instrument panel. Indicator and warning symbols. ABS fault
Speedometer Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page warning symbols1 Rear fog lamp on
222, and Refuelling, page 295.
Symbol for DRIVe - Start/Stop*, see Stability system
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine page 126
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm). Indicator symbols
Stability system, sport mode
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in Engine preheater (diesel)
key position II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols Low level in fuel tank
should go out except the parking brake sym-
bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- Information, read display text
engaged.
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 333.

Symbol Specification 2. Restart the engine. Information, read display text

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to When one of the car's systems does not
Main beam On a workshop to have the ABS system behave as intended, this information symbol
checked. Volvo recommends that you illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
Left-hand direction indicators seek assistance from an authorised Volvo tion display. The message text is cleared with
workshop. the OK button, see page 198, or it disappears
automatically after a time (time depending on 03
Right-hand direction indicators Rear fog lamp on which function is indicated). The information
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
DRIVe - Start/Stop*, the engine is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located other symbols.
auto-stopped, see page 126 on the driver's side.
Stability system NOTE
Not used
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
When a service message is shown, the sym-
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates bol and message are cleared using the OK
with constant glow then there is a fault in the button, or disappear automatically after a
ABL fault
system. time.
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Stability system, Sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving Main beam On
Emissions system
experience. The system then detects whether The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- and with main beam flash.
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
ments and cornering are more active than in
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends Left/right-hand direction indicators
normal driving and then allows controlled skid-
that you seek assistance from an authorised Both direction indicator symbols flash when
ding of the rear section up to a certain level
Volvo workshop. the hazard warning flashers are used.
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
ABS fault DRIVe – Start/Stop*
Engine preheater (diesel)
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not The symbol shines when the engine is auto-
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-
working. The car's regular brake system con- stopped.
ing. Preheating takes place mostly due to low
tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
temperature.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the Low level in fuel tank
engine. When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Warning symbols Parking brake applied and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow see page 337.
Symbol Specification
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
Low oil pressureA flashes during application, and then changes same time, there may be a fault in the brake
over to a constant glow. force distribution system.
Parking brake applied A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
03 Read the message on the information display. engine.
Airbags – SRS Airbags – SRS 2. Restart the engine.
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
Seatbelt reminder while driving, it means a fault has been • If both symbols extinguish, continue
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or driving.
Alternator not charging

IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop • If the symbols remain illuminated, check
to have the system checked. Volvo recom- the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
mends that you seek assistance from an page 337. If the brake fluid level is nor-
Fault in brake system authorised Volvo workshop. mal but the symbols are still illuminated,
the car can be driven, with great care, to
Seatbelt reminder
a workshop to have the brake system
Warning This symbol illuminates if someone in a front checked. Volvo recommends that you
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone seek assistance from an authorised
A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. Volvo workshop.
is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages
333 and 335. Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault WARNING
Low oil pressure has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
If this symbol illuminates during driving then If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the assistance from an authorised Volvo work- before topping up the brake fluid.
engine immediately and check the engine oil shop.
level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
Fault in brake system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
assistance from an authorised Volvo work- may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
shop.
74
WARNING panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as The meters are used to measure short dis-
possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid, tances. The distance is shown in the display.
If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- whichever is open.
nated at the same time, there is a risk that One short press on the control switches
the rear end will skid during heavy braking. If the car is driven at a speed lower than between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long
approx. 7 km/h then the information press (more than 2 seconds) resets the cur-
symbol illuminates. rently displayed trip meter.
Warning 03
The red warning symbol illuminates when a If the car is driven at a speed higher
fault has been indicated which could affect the than approx. 7 km/h then the warning Clock
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- symbol illuminates.
atory text is shown on the information display
at the same time. The symbol remains visible Trip meter
until the fault has been rectified but the text
message can be cleared with the OK button,
see page 198. The warning symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord- Clock and setting knob.
ance with the message in the display. Clear Display for showing the time
the message using the OK button.
Controls for setting the clock
Reminder – doors not closed Trip meter and controls.
If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or tailgate is not Display for trip meter Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set
closed properly then the information or warn- the clock. Turn first to the end position and then
ing symbol illuminates together with an explan- Controls for switching between trip meters turn past/over the end position a further
atory text message in the combined instrument T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip approx. 1 mm - a "click" sounds and is felt in
meters
2 Only cars with alarm*.

the button. Each "click" scrolls 1 minute. In 4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute (A)
order to change quickly - hold in the "click and press OK - the box is activated (B).
position". 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
In connection with a message the clock can be press OK - the box is deactivated.
temporarily replaced by a symbol, see 6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and
page 198. press OK - the setting is complete.
03
Setting the clock in MY CAR The menu option Settings System options
In addition to the previous manual/mechanical Time format selects the 24h or 12h system
method the clock can also be set in the menu (AM/PM).
group MY CAR, for more information see
page 200. RSI*
The function RSI (Road Sign Identification)
helps the driver to see road signs containing
information on current speed, that a motorway
or road is starting/ending and when overtaking
is prohibited. For detailed information on RSI,
see page 148.
1. Locate Settings System options

Time.
2. The cursor is located in the first box for
Hour: Press OK - the box is activated.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK - the box is deactivated.

Volvo Sensus
General the car can be personalised by means of an

intuitive user interface. Settings can be made
in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made. 03
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to

the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting
the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function:
Control panel in centre console RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's sources, systems and functions can be acti-
manual (Road and Traffic Information Sys- vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue-
tem - RTI). tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see For more information on all functions/systems,
page 232. see the respective section in the owner's man-
ual.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 200.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see
page 188.
Climate control, see page 208.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the

heart of your personal Volvo experience. Volvo
Sensus combines and presents many func-
tions in several of the car's systems on the
centre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus

Key positions
Insert and remove the remote control IMPORTANT Level Functions

key
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
0 • Odometer, clock and tem-
perature gauge are illumi-
Do not press the remote control key incor- nated.
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach-
able key blade, see page 50. • Power seats can be adjusted.
03
• The audio system can be
used for a limited time - see
Withdraw the key page 232.
• Push the remote control key, allow it to
eject, then pull it out from the ignition I • Panorama roof, power win-
switch. dows, 12 V socket in the pas-
senger compartment, RTI,
Functions at different levels phone, ventilation fan and
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ In order to enable the use of a limited number windscreen wipers can be
inserted. of functions with the engine switched off, the used.
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different II • The headlamps come on.
NOTE levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
• Warning/indicator lamps illu-
For cars with the Keyless* function the key minate for 5 seconds.
does not need to be inserted into the ignition manual these levels are described using the
switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. denomination "key positions". • Several other systems are
For more information on Keyless functions - activated. However, heating
see page 53. The following table shows the functions avail- in seat cushions and the rear
able in each key position/level. window can only be activated
after the engine has been
Insert the key started.
1. Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the key This key position consumes a
in the ignition switch. lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end
position. avoided!

Key positions
Choosing key position/level Starting and stopping the engine

Key position 0 For information about starting/switching off the
engine - see page 114.
• Unlock the car - this means that the car's
electrical system is at level 0.
Towing
Key position I For important information about the remote
• With the remote control key fully inserted control key during towing - see page 311. 03
into the ignition switch1 - Briefly press
START/STOP ENGINE.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
Key position II
• With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Give a long2 press
on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
• To return to key position 0 from position II
and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's func-
tions with remote control key removed - see
page 232.
1 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.

2 Approx. 2 seconds.

Seats
Front seats WARNING Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving. Make 4. Push the seat forward so that the head
sure that the seat is in locked position in restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident. Raising takes place in reverse order.
03
WARNING
Lowering the front seat backrest
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident.
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the

wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down. The passenger seat backrest can be folded
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
ble.
Control panel for power seat*. Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
1 Also applies to power seat.

Seats
Power seat* Power lumbar support* Seat with memory function*
03
Front edge of seat cushion up/down Lumbar support, increasing Store setting
Seat forward/backward and up/down Lumbar support, decreasing Memory button
Backrest rake The lumbar support can be adjusted when the Memory button
engine is running or when key position II is
The power front seats have overload protection Memory button
active.
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
Button for storing settings
object. If this happens, go to key position I or Preparations
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the The seats can be adjusted for a certain time 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
seat again. after unlocking the door with the remote con- 2. Hold the button depressed to store set-
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) trol key without the key in the ignition switch. tings while depressing one of the memory
can be made at a time. Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- buttons.
tion I and can always be made when the engine
is running. Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
``

Seats
release the button then the movement of the and door mirrors will automatically adopt Heated seats
seat will stop. the positions that are stored in the remote For heated seats, see page 213.
control key's memory (if the seat has been
Key memory* in remote control key2 moved since you locked the car).
Rear seats
The key memory can be activated/deactivated
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Head restraint, centre seat, rear
03 Car settings Car key memory. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 200.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-
ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
All remote control keys can be used by differ- unlock button on the remote control key. The
ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's driver's door must then be open.
seat and door mirrors3. Proceed as follows: Adjust the head restraint according to passen-
• Adjust the seat as you want it. WARNING ger height so that the whole of the back of the
• Lock the car by pressing the lock button on Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
the remote control key that you normally not play with the controls. Check that there required.
use. This stores the positions of the seat are no objects in front of, behind or under To lower the head restraint again, the button
and door mirrors in the remote control the seat during adjustment. Ensure that
none of the backseat passengers will be (located in the centre between the backrest
key's memory4. and head restraint, see illustration) must be
trapped.
• Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but- pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
ton on the same remote control key) and down carefully.
open the driver's door. The driver's seat
2 For key memory for Keyless function, see page 54.
3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
4 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

Seats
Manual lowering of the outer head Lowering the rear seat backrest
restraints, rear seat
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the 03
rear seat upholstery.
The triple-section backrest can be folded in

different ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
Pull the locking handle closest to the head wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
restraint to fold the head restraint forward. upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
• The left-hand section can be folded sepa- If the centre backrest is being lowered -
WARNING rately. fold and adjust the centre backrest's head
The head restraints must be in locked posi- • The centre section can be folded sepa- restraint downwards, see page 82.
tion after being raised. rately.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
• The right-hand section can only be folded matically when the outer backrests are
together with the centre section. lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
• If the entire backrest is to be folded then handle while folding the backrest for-
the different sections should be folded ward at the same time. A red indicator on
separately. the lock catch shows that the backrest
is no longer locked in place.
83
Seats
Raising takes place in reverse order. 1. The remote control key must be in position
I or II.
NOTE 2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
When the backrest has been raised, the red head restraints to improve rearward visi-
indicator should no longer be showing. If it bility.
is still showing then the backrest is not
03 locked in place. WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
WARNING there are any passengers using of the outer
seats.
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked
after raising. Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints* WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked posi-
tion after being raised.

Steering wheel
Adjusting WARNING Horn

Adjust and secure the steering wheel before
driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of

steering force can be adjusted, see page 224. 03
Keypads*
G021138
Adjusting the steering wheel. Horn.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
Keypads in the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Cruise control, see page 150
that suits you.
Adaptive cruise control, see page 152
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the Menu, audio and phone control, see
steering wheel lightly at the same time as page 233.
you push the lever back.

Lighting
Headlamp control Headlamp control with AUTO mode The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
03
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the
car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Overview, headlamp control. Overview, headlamp control.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto-
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not
instrument lighting
equipped with the thumbwheel.
Rear fog lamp Rear fog lamp
Headlamp control Headlamp control
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 78.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

Lighting
Main/dipped beam Position Specification Headlamp control with AUTO mode
Dipped beamA/Dipped beam

off.
Main beam can be activatedA.
Main beam flash operates in 03
this position.
Position/parking lamps
Dipped beam
Main beam can be activated.
Headlamp control and stalk switch. Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Main beam flash operates in
Position for main beam flash Position for main beam flash
this position.
Position for main beam A
Position for main beam
Applies to certain markets.
Position Specification
Dipped beam off.
this position.
Position/parking lamps
``

Lighting
Position Specification Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is Main beam with automatic activation -
released. AHB*
Dipped beamA/Dipped beam Main beam with automatic activation (Active
off in good light conditions. The Dipped beam High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a
"Tunnel detection*" function When the engine is started, dipped beam is camera sensor at the top edge of the wind-
activates dipped beam in poor activated automatically2 if the headlamp con- screen to detect the headlamp beams of
03 light conditions. trol is in position . If necessary, auto- oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
The function for "Main beam matic dipped beam for this position can be front, and then switches from main beam to
with automatic activation*" can deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom- dipped beam. The lights are switched back to
be used. mends that you contact an authorised Volvo main beam a second or so after the camera
workshop. sensor no longer detects any such light.
this position. In position dipped beam is always In cars with this function the headlamp control
switched on when the engine is running or has another design, see page 87.
Dipped beam when key position II is active. This function can be activated when the head-
Main beam can be activated. lamp control is in position . For activation
Main beam
Main beam flash operates in to take place, the engine must have been run-
Main beam can be activated when the head-
this position. ning for at least 20 seconds and the speed of
lamp control is in position 2 or . the car must be 20 km/h or higher.
A Applies to certain markets. Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the
stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
Volvo recommends that mode is used, end position and release.
as long as the traffic situation or weather con- When main beam has been activated the sym-
ditions are not unfavourable for the function for
bol illuminates in the combined instru-
"Main beam with automatic activation*".
ment panel.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-
ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.
2 Applies to certain markets, for headlamp control without AUTO mode.

Lighting
When AHB has been activated the symbol

message goes out and the symbol illu-
illuminates in the combined instru- minates.
ment panel's display. When main beam has
been activated the symbol also illumi- WARNING
nates in the combined instrument panel. AHB is an aid for using optimum light com-
position when conditions are favourable. 03
NOTE The driver always bears responsibility for
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the manually switching between main and
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist dipped beam when traffic situations or
and dirt. weather conditions so require.
Light switch in position AUTO.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor, as this
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- could reduce or prevent the function of one
hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel or more camera-dependent systems.
to the end position and release. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights If the message AHB temporary unavailable
switch directly to dipped beam. is shown in the combined instrument panel's
display then you have to switch manually
between main and dipped beam. However, the
headlamp control may nevertheless be in posi-
tion . The same applies if the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked and the
symbol are shown. The sym-
bol goes out when these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in sit-
uations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the wind-
screen sensors are no longer covered, the
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
89
Lighting
IMPORTANT e.g. driven into a tunnel, and dipped beam is The function is activated automatically when
activated within a second in markets without the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
Examples of when manual switching automatic dipped beam. Dipped beam is deac- function the symbol illuminates in the
between main and dipped beam may be tivated approx. 20 seconds after the car has
required: combined instrument panel at the same time
been driven out of the tunnel. Note! - The head- as the information display shows an explana-
• In heavy rain or dense fog lamp control must be in position for tun- tory text and a further illuminated symbol.
03 • In snow flurries or slush nel detection to work.
• In moonlight
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Symbol Display Specifica-
• When driving in poorly lit built-up areas tion
• When the traffic ahead has weak light- Headlamp The system
ing failure is disen-
• If there are pedestrians on or beside the Service gaged. Visit
road required a workshop
• If there are highly reflective objects such if the mes-
as signs in the vicinity of the road sage
remains.
• When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier Volvo rec-
ommends
• When there is traffic on connecting that you
roads
contact an
• On the brow of a hill or in a hollow Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) authorised
and activated (right) respectively. Volvo work-
• In sharp bends.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- shop.
For more information on the limitations of the lamps Active Bending Lights - ABL the light
camera sensor, see page 175. from the headlamps follows the steering wheel The function is only active in twilight or dark-
movement in order to provide maximum light- ness and only when the car is moving.
Tunnel detection* ing in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety. The function3 can be deactivated/activated in
In cars with rain sensor* the rain sensor detects
the changed light conditions when the car is the menu system MY CAR under My XC60
3 Activated on delivery from the factory.

Lighting
Active Bending Lights or under Settings Turn the headlamp control to the position for Rear fog lamp
Car settings Light settings Active position/parking lamps (number plate lighting
Bending Lights. For a description of the menu is illuminated at the same time).
system, see page 201. When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see opened the rear position lamps illuminate to
page 94. alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespec-
tive of what position the headlamp control is in 03
Auxiliary lamps* or what key position the car's electrical system
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use is in.
the MY CAR menu system to choose whether
they should be deactivated or switched on/off Brake lights
simultaneously with the main beam4, see The brake light automatically comes on during
page 202. braking. For information on the Emergency Button for rear fog lamp.
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
Position/parking lamps flashers, see page 133. The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and
can only be switched on in combination with
main/dipped beam.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp
indicator symbol on the combined
instrument panel and the light in the button illu-
minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
Headlamp control in position for position/parking between different countries.
lamps.
4 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Lighting
Hazard warning flashers Direction indicators/flashers Direction indicator symbols

For direction indicator symbols, see page 72.
Interior lighting
03
Button for hazard warning flashers. Direction indicators/flashers.
G021149
Press the button to activate the hazard warning Short flash sequence
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in Move the stalk switch up or down to the
the combined instrument panel flash when the first position and release. The direction Controls in roof console for the front reading
hazard warning flashers are in use. lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
indicators flash three times. The function
The hazard warning flashers are activated can be activated/deactivated in the menu Reading lamp, left-hand side
automatically when the car has been braked so system MY CAR under Settings Car Reading lamp, right-hand side
suddenly that the emergency brake lights have settings Light settings Triple
been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The indicator. For a description of the menu Interior lighting
hazard warning flashers remain on when the system, see page 201. All lighting in the passenger compartment can
car has stopped and are deactivated automat-
be switched on and off manually within
ically when the car is driven off again or the Continuous flash sequence 30 minutes from when:
button is depressed. For more information on Move the stalk switch up or down to the
Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard outer position. • the engine has been switched off and the
warning flashers, see page 133. car's electrical system is in key position 0
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the • the car has been unlocked but the engine
steering wheel movement. has not been started.
92
Lighting
Front roof lighting Lighting, cargo area

The front reading lamps are switched on or off The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- and off respectively when the tailgate is
sole. opened or closed.
Rear roof lighting Automatic lighting

The switch for passenger compartment light- 03
ing has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
• Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic
lighting deactivated.
Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.

• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-
vated.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing • On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
each respective button. compartment lighting switched on.
G021150
Courtesy lighting Neutral position

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- When the button is in neutral position the pas-
Rear roof lighting. ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- senger compartment lighting is switched on
tively when a side door is opened or closed. and off automatically in accordance with the
following.
Glovebox lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
• the car is unlocked with the remote control
Vanity mirror key or key blade, see pages 47 or 50
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 227, is switched on and off respectively
• the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
when the cover is opened or closed.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
``
93
Lighting
• the engine is started the same way as with main beam flash, see Adjusting headlamp pattern
• the car is locked. page 87.
The passenger compartment lighting comes 3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
on and remains on for two minutes if one of the When the function is activated, dipped beam,
doors is open. parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
03 If any lighting is switched on manually and the plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
car is locked then it will be switched off auto- lighting are switched on.
matically after two minutes. The length of time for which the home safe
Mood lights lighting should be kept on can be set in the
When the normal passenger compartment menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
G021151
lighting is switched off and the engine is run- settings Light settings Home safe light
ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, including duration. For a description of the menu sys-
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide a tem, see page 201.
low-light and enhance the mood while driving.
This lighting goes out for a little while after the Approach light duration
normal passenger compartment lighting when
the car is locked. Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 47, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Home safe light duration
When the function is activated with the remote
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and
the car has been locked.
courtesy lighting are switched on.
G021152
1. Remove the remote control key from the
The length of time for which the approach light-
ignition switch.
ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the system MY CAR under Settings Car
steering wheel to the end position and settings Light settings Approach light The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to
release it. The function can be activated in avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be
duration. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see page 201.
94
Lighting
set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat- • D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
tern will also better illuminate the verge. 2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
Active Xenon headlamps* waterproof material and cut it out.
The car must be stationary with the engine run- 3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the
ning when the headlamp pattern is shifted right distance from the edge of the head-
between right and left-hand traffic. lamp lens using the illustration, see 03
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under page 96, and the dimensions in the fol-
lowing list:
Settings Car settings Light
settings. • Templates A and D: horizontal line
approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx.
2. Select between Temporary RH traffic 20 mm
and Temporary LH traffic.
• Templates B and C: horizontal line
For a description of the menu system, see approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx.
page 201 14 mm
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,
see page 97:
• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
``

Lighting
Aligning the templates
03
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
96
Lighting
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
97
Wipers and washing
Windscreen wipers1 Continuous wiping the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
The wipers sweep at normal speed. thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the
The wipers sweep at high speed. button the rain sensor symbol is shown
in the right-hand display in the combined
03
instrument panel.
IMPORTANT
Activating and setting the sensitivity
Before activating the wipers during winter - When activating the rain sensor, the car must
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen be running or the remote control key in position
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-
I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch
screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
must be in position 0 or in the position for a
single sweep.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button
Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers . The windscreen wipers make one
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency sweep.
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating. Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
Windscreen wipers off an extra sweep.
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
Service position wiper blade Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-
switch off the windscreen wipers.
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An
Single sweep replacement of wiper blades see see extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
Raise the stalk switch and release to page 345 and 364. turned upward.)
make one sweep. Deactivate
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time screen wipers based on how much water it ton or move the stalk switch down to
unit with the thumbwheel when inter- detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of another wiper program.
mittent wiping is selected.
1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 345, service position, wiper blade see page 345 and filling washer fluid see page 347.

Wipers and washing
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Washing the windscreen Wiping and washing the rear window
when the remote control key is removed from Move the stalk switch toward the steering
the ignition switch or five minutes after the wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
engine has been switched off. washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
IMPORTANT sweeps and the headlamps are washed once
the stalk switch has been released. 03
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor while the car is running Heated washer nozzles*
or the remote control key is in position I or The washer nozzles are heated automatically
II. The symbol in the combined instrument in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
panel and the lamp in the button go out. freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*

Washing the headlamps and windows High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the Rear window wiper – continuous speed
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle. Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window
Reduced washing washing and wiping.
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should NOTE
fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined
instrument panel's display, then the supply of The rear window wiper is equipped with
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. overheating protection which means that
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- the motor is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a cool-
screen and the visibility through it. ing period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat in the motor and the outside
Washing function. temperature).

Wipers and washing
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping2. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
03
tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window
wiper is activated with reversing, if the sen-
sor is activated and it is raining.
2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
100
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
General Heat-reflecting windscreen* windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the

highlighted area in the above illustration).
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama roof
have laminated glass. It is reinforced Power windows
which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved 03
sound insulation in the passenger compart-
ment. Other glass surfaces*.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*

Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see
Areas where IR film is not applied.
page 365.
IMPORTANT Dimensions
Driver's door control panel.
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice A 47 mm
from the windows. Use the defroster to Switch for electric child safety locks* and
remove ice from the mirrors, see page 104. B 87 mm disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 62.
The windscreen is equipped with a heat- Rear window controls
reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment. Front window controls
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with WARNING
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and Check that none of the rear seat passengers
performance. is in danger of becoming trapped in any way
For the optimal function of electronic equip- when closing the windows from the driver's
door.
ment, it should be positioned on the part of the

WARNING Operating Closing of the windows is stopped and the

window is opened if anything prevents its
Make sure that children or other passengers movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-
are not in danger of becoming trapped in tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.
any way when closing the windows, in par-
ticular when the remote control key is used. with ice, by continuously holding the button up
until the window is closed. The pinch protec-
03 tion is reactivated after a brief pause.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to NOTE
always switch off the power supply to the One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
power windows by selecting key position 0 when the rear windows are open is to also
and then take the remote control key with open the front windows slightly.
you when leaving the car. For information on
key positions - see page 79. Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
Operating with auto power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control Operating with auto
panels for the other doors can only each oper- Move one of the controls up/down to the end
ate their respective power window. Only one position and release it. The window runs auto-
control panel can be operated at a time. matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
In order for the power windows to be used the
key position must be at least I - see page 78. and central locking
The power windows can be operated for a few To remotely operate the power windows from
minutes after the engine has been switched off the outside with the remote control key or from
and after the remote control key has been inside with central locking, see pages 48 and
removed - although not after a door has been 56.
opened.
102
Resetting Door mirrors Storing the position1

If the battery is disconnected then the function The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
for automatic opening must be reset so that it ory when the car has been locked with the
can work correctly. remote control key. When the car is unlocked
1. Gently raise the front section of the button with the same remote control key the mirrors
to raise the window to its end position and and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions
hold it there for one second. when the driver's door is opened. 03
2. Release the button briefly. The function can be activated/deactivated in

the menu system MY CAR under Settings
3. Raise the front section of the button again
Car settings Car key memory Personal
for one second.
settings in key memory. For a description of
the menu system, see page 201.
WARNING
Door mirror controls. Angling the door mirror when parking1
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that
pinch protection works. The door mirror can be angled down for the
Adjusting
driver to view the side of the road when parking
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
for example.
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illumi- – Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
nates. button.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
centre. automatically returns to its original position
after approx. 10 seconds, or sooner by press-
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
ing the L and R button.
should no longer be illuminated.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
WARNING when parking1
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- is automatically angled down so that the driver
ther away than they actually are. can see the side of the road when parking for
1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 81.
103
example. When reverse gear is disengaged the 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. Rear window and door mirror
mirror automatically returns to its original posi- defrosters
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
tion after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in Retractable power door mirrors*
the menu system MY CAR under Settings The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
03
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip- 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
tion of the menu system, see page 201. ously (key position must be at least I).
Automatic retraction when locking1 2. Release them after
When the car is locked/unlocked with the approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically stop in the fully retracted posi-
matically retracted/extended. tion.
The function can be activated/deactivated in Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
the menu system MY CAR under Settings and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors Use the defroster to quickly remove misting
automatically stop in the fully extended posi- and ice from the rear window and the door mir-
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
tion. rors.
mirrors. For a description of the menu system,
see page 201. Home safe and approach lighting One press of the button starts the heating. The
Resetting to neutral The light on the door mirrors illuminates when light in the button indicates that the function is
Mirrors that have been moved out of position approach lighting or home safe lighting is active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the
by an external force must be reset electrically selected, see page 94. ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
to the neutral position for electric retracting/ battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is
extending to work correctly: switched off automatically after a certain time.
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- The door mirrors and rear window are demis-
tons. ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started
in an outside temperature lower than +9 °C.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- Automatic defrosting can be selected in the
tons.
menu system MY CAR under Settings
1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 81.

Climate settings Automatic rear Automatic dimming*

defroster. Select between On or Off. For a Bright light from behind is automatically
description of the menu system, see dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is
page 201. not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
Interior rearview mirror The compass* can only be specified for rear-
view mirrors with automatic dimming, see 03
page 106.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when lights
from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.

Compass*
Operation should be calibrated if the car is moved across 4. Hold the button on the underside of the
several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows: rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the cur-
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
rent magnetic zone is shown.
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines. 5. Press the button repeatedly until the
2. Start the car. required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
03 See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
NOTE
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the
For optimum calibration - switch off all elec-
character C.
trical equipment (climate control system,
wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are 7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
closed. more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
Rearview mirror with compass. tion is shown in the display, indicating that
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview 3. Hold the button on the underside of the calibration is complete. Then drive a further
mirror has an integrated display that shows the rearview mirror depressed 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
compass direction in which the front of the car approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown example) until the character C is shown.
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 78. To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the underside of the mir-
ror using a paper clip for example.
Calibration
G030295
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographic area to
which the car was delivered. The compass Magnetic zones.

Power panorama roof*
General WARNING Operating

The panorama roof is divided into two sections.
Children, other passengers or objects may
Only the front section can be opened - hori- be trapped by the panorama roof's moving
zontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation parts.
position).
• Always operate the panorama roof with
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of caution. 03
perforated fabric and located under the glass
• Do not allow children to play with the
roof to provide extra protection from factors controls.
such as strong sunlight.
• Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the panorama roof by
selecting key position 0 and then take
the remote control key/PCC* with you
when leaving the car. For information on
Opening, automatic
key positions - see page 79.
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
The panorama roof and curtain can be oper-
ated in key position I or II.
The panorama roof and curtain are operated Automatic operation

with a control located in the roof. The control 1. To open the curtain all the way - press the
is activated when the key is in position I or II, control rearward to the automatic opening
see page 78. position and release.
2. To then open the panorama roof all the way
- press the control rearward again to the
automatic opening position and release.

Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- When the ventilation position is selected the
ing procedure in reverse order - press the con- ing procedure in reverse order - press the con- front section is raised at its rear edge. If the
trol forward to the automatic closing position trol forward to the manual closing position curtain is fully closed when ventilation position
instead. instead. is selected - then it opens automatically
approx. 50 mm.
Rapid opening/closing
The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/ NOTE
03
Closing using the remote control key or
closed simultaneously: For manual opening, the curtain must be central locking button
fully open before the panorama roof can be
• To open - press the control rearward to the opened. For the reverse procedure, the
automatic operation position twice and panorama roof must be fully closed before
release. the curtain can be closed.
• To close - press the control forward to the
automatic operation position twice and
Ventilation position
release.
Manual operation
1. To open the curtain - press the control
rearward to the point of resistance for man-
ual opening. The curtain moves towards
maximum opening as long as the button is
depressed.
One long press on the lock button, see pages
2. To angle the panorama roof - press the 47 (remote control key) and 56 (central locking
control rearward again to the point of resis- button), closes the panorama roof and all the
tance for manual opening windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and
3. To open the panorama roof - press the the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt
control rearward to the point of resistance Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. closing, press the lock button again.
for manual opening a third time. The pan- Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
orama roof moves towards maximum trol upward. WARNING
opening as long as the button is kept If closing the panorama roof with the remote
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-
depressed. control key, make sure nothing could
trol down.
become trapped.

Wind deflector
03
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is

folded up when the panorama roof is in the
open position.

Alcolock*
General information on the alcolock Functions Operation

The alcolock's1 function is to prevent the car
Battery
from being driven by individuals under the
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
tus:
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
03 of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in Indicator lamp Battery status
accordance with each market's limit value in (4)
force for driving legally.
Green flashing Charging in pro-
gress
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt Green Fully charged
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
Yellow Semi-charged
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
1. Nozzle for breath test.
to drive the car safely. Red Discharged - fit the
2. Switch.
charger in the holder
3. Transmission button. or connect the
4. Lamp for battery status. power supply cable
5. Lamp for result of breath test. from the glovebox.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
1 Also called Alcoguard.

Alcolock*
Storage unlocked then it must first be activated Result after breath test
with the switch (2).
Indicator lamp Specification
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath (5) + Display text
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. Green lamp + Alco- Start the engine - no
The result will be one of the alternatives in guard Approved alcohol content
the following table Result after breath test measured. 03
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmis- Yellow lamp + Alco- Engine starting pos-
sion to the car may have failed - in which guard Approved sible - measured
case, press the button (3) to transmit the test alcohol content is
result to the car manually. above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
Handheld unit storage and charging station. in its holder. value in forceA.
• The handheld alcolock unit is released by 6. Start the engine following an approved Red lamp + Disap- Engine starting not
depressing it slightly in its holder and breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it proved test Wait 1 possible - measured
releasing it - it then springs out and can be must be repeated. minute alcohol content is
removed from the holder. above the limit value
• Replace the handheld unit in the holder by in forceA.
pushing it in until it engages.
A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
• Store the handheld unit in the holder - this See also the section entitled General information on the
provides it with the best protection and Alcolock on page 110
keeps its batteries fully charged.
NOTE
Before starting the engine
After a completed period of driving, the
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
then ready for use when the car is opened. without a new breath test.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is

Alcolock*
To bear in mind tion will then be possible, see page 112 sec- In extremely cold weather the heating time can
tion Emergency situation. be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu- The message can be cleared by pressing the Emergency situation
rate a measurement result as possible: send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on In the event of an emergency situation or the
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass
• Avoid eating or drinking approx. pears each time the engine is started - only the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
03 5 minutes before the breath test. recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes-
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the sage permanently.
NOTE
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result. Cold or hot weather All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
The colder the weather the longer it takes memory, see page 8 in the section, Record-
Change of driver before the Alcolock is ready for use: ing data.
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-
ried out in the event of a change of driver - After the Bypass function has been activated
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) the display shows Alcoguard Bypass
ing time (sec-
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At enabled the whole time while driving and can
onds)
which point the car returns to start inhibition
only be reset by a workshop2.
mode and a new approved breath test is +10 to +85 10
required before starting the engine. The Bypass function can be tested without the
-5 to +10 60 error message being logged - in which case,
Calibration and service carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated -40 to -5 180 The error message is cleared when the car is
at a workshop2 every 12 months. locked.
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
30 days before recalibration is necessary the When the Alcolock is installed, either the
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert
calibration is not carried out within these 30 the bypassing option. This setting can be
power cable. In which case, connect the
days then normal engine starting will be changed afterwards at a workshop2.
power supply cable from the glovebox and wait
blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
until indicator lamp (6) is green.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Alcolock*
Activating the Bypass function Symbols and display messages Display text Meaning/Action
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk In addition to the previously described mes-
switch OK button and the button for haz- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- Alcoguard Blow Blowing too weak -
ard warning flashers simultaneously for play can also show the following: harder blow harder.
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and Alcoguard wait Heating not finished
then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after Display text Meaning/Action Preheating - wait for text Alco- 03
which the engine can be started. Alcoguard Restart The engine has been guard Blow 5 sec-
This function can be activated several times. possible switched off for less onds.
The error message shown during driving can than 30 minutes -
only be cleared at a workshop2. engine starting pos-
Activating the Emergency function sible without new
test.
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for haz- Alcoguard Service Contact a work-
ard warning flashers simultaneously for
required shop2.
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the Alcoguard No sig- Transmission failed -
engine can be started. nal send manually with
This function can be used once, after which a button (3) or take a
reset must be made at a workshop2. new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid Test failed - take a

test new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow Blowing too short -

longer blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow Blowing too hard -

softer blow more gently.

Starting the engine
Petrol and diesel engines 2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For NOTE
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.) The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button cold starting. This is so that the emissions
and then release it. system can reach normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which min-
03 The starter motor works until the engine starts imises exhaust emissions and protects the
or until its overheating protection triggers. environment.
IMPORTANT Keyless drive*

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel
wait for 3 minutes before making a further engines. For more information on Keyless drive
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the - see page 53.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ battery is allowed to recover.
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
NOTE
IMPORTANT WARNING A prerequisite for the car to start is that one
Never remove the remote control key from of the car's remote control keys with the
Do not press in the remote control key incor- Keyless drive* function is in the passenger
the ignition switch after starting the engine
rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- compartment or cargo area.
or when the car is being towed.
able key blade, see page 50.
WARNING WARNING
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position. Always remove the remote control key from Never remove the remote control key from
Note that if the car is equipped with an the ignition switch when leaving the car, and the car while driving or during towing.
alcolock then a breath test must first be make sure that the key position is 0 - in par-
approved before the engine can be started ticular if there are children in the car. For Stop the engine
- see page 110. information on how this works - see
To switch off the engine:
page 79.
• Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine
stops.
1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

Starting the engine
If the gear selector is not in P position or if the Remote start - ERS* WARNING
car is moving:
General information on ERS To remote-start the engine, the following
• Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start) criteria must be met:
hold the button depressed until the engine
means that the car's engine can be started • The car must be supervised
stops.
remotely using the remote control key. This is
so that the passenger compartment can be
• There must be no people or animals
Steering lock inside the car 03
A mechanical noise can be perceived when the warmed up/cooled down before departure.
• The car must not be parked in a closed,
steering lock unlocks or locks. The climate control starts with the same set- unventilated area - the exhaust gases
• The steering lock unlocks when the remote tings that were being used when the car was may seriously injure humans and ani-
control key is in the ignition switch2 and the parked. mals.
START/STOP ENGINE button is An ERS-started engine is activated for a maxi-
depressed. mum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. After
• The steering lock locks when the driver's two ERS-activations the engine must be
door is opened after the engine has been started in the normal way before ERS can be
switched off. re-used.
Key positions The ERS option is only available on cars with

For information on the remote control key's dif- automatic gearbox.
ferent key positions - see page 78
NOTE
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
idling.
2 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

Starting the engine
Operation 1. Briefly press on the remote control key's To check whether ERS has started the engine,
lock button (1). the user can press the Information button (3) -
2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a if the engine has started, there is a light indi-
long press - at least 2 seconds - on cation on the button for Approach lighting (2).
button (2). Active functions
If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the The following functions are activated with a
03 following takes place: remote started engine:
1. All direction indicators flash quickly several • Ventilation system
times. • Audio/video system.
2. The engine starts. Deactivated functions
3. All direction indicators illuminate with a The following functions are deactivated with a
constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that remote started engine:
Remote control buttons for remote start. the engine has started.
Locking
• headlamps
NOTE • Position lamps
Approach lighting
After remote starting, the car continues to • Number plate lighting
Information3 be locked but with the alarm deactivated. • Windscreen wiper.
Remote starting the engine the engine is switched off

With PCC4 key The following steps switch off an ERS-started
Maximum distance for enabling remote star-
The light indication for Approach engine:
ting of the engine is approx. 30 metres in unob-
lighting5 flashes several times when
structed space - in addition, the car must be • The remote control key's lock button (1) is
the button is pressed and then goes
locked. depressed
to constant glow if all criteria for ERS
To remote start the engine: have been fulfilled. However, this does not • The car is unlocked
mean that ERS has started the engine. • A door is opened
3 Only on PCC key, see page 49.

4 Read about the PCC key on page 49.
5 Read about Approach lighting on page 48 and 94.
116
Starting the engine
• Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is Message Specification Message Specification

depressed
• The gear selector is moved out of P posi- No remote start ERS unavailable due No remote start ERS unavailable
tion low battery to low battery volt- low fuel level because fuel level
age. Charge the bat- too low.
• There is less than approx.10 litres left in the
fuel tank tery by starting the
engine. No remote start ERS unavailable 03
• Active ERS time passes 15 minutes. Max 2 starts because a maximum
When an ERS-started engine is switched off, No remote start ERS unavailable of 2 ERS activations
all direction indicators illuminate with a con- driver in car because someone in succession are
stant glow for 3 seconds. was in the passen- allowed.
ger compartment.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages in the display
In situations where the ERS function fails or is No remote start ERS unavailable due Interrupted ERS function
interrupted, a symbol is shown on the instru- engine warning to warning message
from engine. Con- Message Specification
ment panel, supplemented by an explanatory
message - Follow any recommendation given. tact a workshopA. Remote start off ERS interrupted
low battery because battery
ERS function unavailable No remote start ERS unavailable
voltage too low.
gear not in P because gear selec-
Message Specification
tor was not in P posi- Remote start off ERS interrupted
No remote start ERS unavailable tion. low fuel level because fuel level
door open because a door/tail- too low.
No remote start ERS unavailable due
gate was not closed.
engine coolant to error message Remote start off ERS interrupted due
No remote start ERS unavailable from cooling sys- engine warning to error message
car not locked because the car was tem, see page 336. from engine. Con-
not locked. tact a workshopA.
``
117
Starting the engine
Message Specification
Remote start off ERS interrupted
gear not in P because gear selec-
tor is not in P posi-
tion.
03
Remote start off ERS interrupted
driver in car because someone is
in the passenger
compartment.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
118
Starting the engine – external battery
Jump starting 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps IMPORTANT
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
IMPORTANT forming.
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
engine compartment. 03
first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the lead's clamps comes into contact with
battery in your car and remove the cover, the battery's positive terminal or the
see page 349. clamp connected to the red jump lead!
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2). WARNING
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery. 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
clamps to the donor battery's negative ter- gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
When jump starting the car, the following steps minal (3). can be formed if a jump lead is con-
are recommended to avoid short circuits or nected incorrectly, and this can be
other damage: 8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
enough for the battery to explode.
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- the top, the outer screw head (4). • The battery contains sulphuric acid,
tion 0, see page 78. which can cause serious burns.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage affixed securely so that there are no sparks • If sulphuric acid comes into contact
of 12 V. with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
during the starting procedure.
large quantities of water. If acid
3. If the donor battery is installed in another 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and splashes into the eyes - seek medical
car - switch off the donor car's engine and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed attention immediately.
make sure that the two cars do not touch slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
each other.
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- For more information on the car's battery - see
charged battery. page 348.
119
Gearboxes
IMPORTANT Gear indicator1

The operating temperature of the gearbox is
checked in order to prevent damage to any
of the drive system's components. In the
event of a risk of overheating a warning
symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
03 combined with a text message - In which
case, follow the recommendation given.
Manual gearbox
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions - An essential detail in connection with environ-
reverse gear position differs between them. mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted change gear in time.
on the gear lever.
The driver is assisted by an indicator - GSI
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver
gear change. when it is most advantageous to engage the
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal between next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
gear changes. lowest possible fuel consumption. However,
taking into consideration characteristics such
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox. WARNING as performance and vibration-free running, it
may be advantageous to change gear at a
Always apply the parking brake when park-
ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not higher engine speed.
sufficient to hold the car in all situation. Indication is made with an up or down arrow in
the combined instrument panel's right-hand
display.
1 Only manual gearbox for the D2 model.
120
Gearboxes
Reverse gear inhibitor NOTE

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
gear during normal forward travel.
• Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position, IMPORTANT
N before moving it to R position. 03
The car must be stationary when position
• Only engage reverse gear when the car is P is selected.
stationary.
WARNING
NOTE
Always apply the parking brake when park-
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear ing on a slope - the automatic transmis-
for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra- positions.
sion's P position is not sufficient to hold the
tion) - first press down the gear lever in the The information display shows the position of car in all situation.
N position in order to engage reverse gear. the gear selector using the following indica-
tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see Reverse position - R
page 71. The car must be stationary when R position is
Automatic gearbox Geartronic*
Gear positions selected.
Parking position - P Neutral position - N

No gear is engaged and the engine can be
Select P when starting the engine or when the
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
car is parked. The brake pedal must be
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
depressed to disengage the gear selector from
the P position. Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
down takes place automatically based on the
P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
as well, as a precaution - see page 137.
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to D position from R position.

Gearboxes
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-) NOTE tion at +/– - the instrument panel display
The driver can also change gear manually shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after 2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal the lever has been moved forwards or back- forward towards + (plus) twice - the display
is released. wards in its (-+/–) position. The information shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving display then shifts the indication from S to 3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
03 the lever to the side from D position to the end show which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
position at +/–. The information display shifts moves off with a lower engine speed and
the indication from D to one of the figures 1 – Geartronic - Sport mode (S)2 reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is The Sport programme provides sportier cha-
engaged just then, see page 71. racteristics and allows higher engine speed for Kick-down
the gears. At the same time it responds more When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) way to the floor (beyond the position normally
to change up a gear and release the lever, quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
which returns to its rest position between
+ and –. a delayed upshift. immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
or Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to
the side from D position to the end position at If the accelerator is released from the kick-
• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to +/–. The information display shifts the indica- down position, the gearbox automatically
change down a gear and release it. changes up.
tion from D to S.
The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be
Sport mode can be selected at any time while Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
selected at any time while driving.
driving. tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than Safety function
Geartronic - Winter mode
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
to avoid jerking and stalling. control program has a protective downshift
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
To return to automatic driving mode: 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the tion.
gear lever from D position to the end posi-
• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
tion at D.
2 Only models D5 and T6.
122
Gearboxes
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- With the inhibitor button depressed the lever Deactivate automatic gear selector
down which would result in an engine speed can be moved forwards or backwards between inhibitor
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing P, R, N and D.
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original Automatic gear selector inhibitor
gear remains engaged. The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems: 03
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending Parking position (P)
on engine speed. The car changes up when the Stationary car with engine running:
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-
prevent damage to the engine. ing the gear selector to another position.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
battery, the gear selector must be moved from
depressed and the remote control key must be
the P position so that the car can be moved.
in position II, see page 78.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N) Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
If the gear selector is in N position and the car behind the centre console and open the
has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irre- hatch.
spective of whether the engine is running) then Fully insert the key blade. Press the key
the gear selector is locked. blade down and hold (For information on
G021351
To be able to move the gear selector from N to the key blade, see page 50.)
other gear positions, the brake pedal must be Move the gear selector from the P position.
The gear selector can be moved forward and depressed and the remote control key must be
back freely between N and D. Other positions in position II, see page 78.
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
``
123
Gearboxes
Automatic gearbox Powershift* sion, this can be verified by checking the des- slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
ignation on the transmission's label under the hitched. The transmission cools down when
bonnet - see page 372. The designa- the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans- and the engine running at idling speed.
mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
transmission.
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
03 and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that there is a moderate distance to the traffic
the pressure in the brake system remains for ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
several seconds while the foot is moved from wait another moment with your foot on the
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before brake pedal.
setting off or reversing uphill.
IMPORTANT
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear The temporary braking effect releases after
positions. several seconds or when the driver acceler- Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
ates. on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
Powershift is a 6-stage automatic gearbox that with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast could then overheat.
To bear in mind
to a conventional automatic gearbox. A con-
The transmission's double clutch has overload
ventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic
protection that is activated if it becomes too For important information regarding Powershift
torque converter instead that transfers power
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the transmission and towing - see page 311.
from engine to gearbox.
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
Powershift transmission operates in the same long time. Text message and action
way and has similar controls and functions as In some situations the display may show a
Overheated transmission causes the car to message at the same time as a symbol is illu-
the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminated.
bed in the previous section.
minates and the information display shows a
Powershift or Geartronic? message. The transmission can also overheat
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-

Gearboxes
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- Transmission overheated. Keep the car
stant engine speed. stationary using the foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car
immediately in a safe manner.A 03
Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool-
ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the
gear lever in the N or P position until the
message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased WARNING

degree of seriousness should the transmission
become too hot. In parallel with the display text If a warning symbol combined with the text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec- Transm. overheat park safely is ignored
then the heat in the gearbox may become
tronics are temporarily changing the driving so high that the power transmission
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the between engine and gearbox is temporarily
information display where appropriate. halted in order to prevent the clutch from
malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and
NOTE is stationary until gearbox temperature has
cooled to an acceptable level.
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated inten- For more possible display messages with their
tionally to prevent damage to one of the respective proposals for solutions concerning
car's components. automatic transmission, see page 198.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk OK button.
125
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Quieter and cleaner General information on Start/Stop Function and operation
03
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-

ration's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target-orientation has resulted The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and
in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept cleaner.... Start/Stop On/Off.
consists of an interaction between several sep-
arate energy-saving functions, all with the Some engine and gearbox combinations come Illuminates briefly on activation and for text
common purpose of reducing fuel consump- fitted with a Start and Stop function which messages.
tion, which in turn contributes to reduced engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or
waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then The engine is auto-stopped.
exhaust emissions.
switched off temporarily and restarts automat- The Start/Stop function is activated
ically when the journey is due to continue. automatically when the engine is
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the started with the key. The driver is alerted to the
opportunity for a more active environmentally function by means of this symbol on the instru-
conscious way of driving the car by means of ment panel illuminating briefly, the display text
being able to allow the engine to stop auto- Auto Start-Stop ON is shown and the green
matically, whenever appropriate. lamp for the On/Off button illuminates.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine
that has stopped automatically, except that
some equipment may have the function tem-
porarily reduced, e.g. the climate control sys-

DRIVe Start/Stop*
tem's fan speed or extremely high volume on Auto-starting the engine Disengaged Start/Stop func-
the audio system. tion is indicated by the infor-
ConditionsA M/AB mation display's symbol
Auto-stopping the engine going out and the message
With the gear lever in neutral posi- M
The following is required for the engine to auto- Auto Start-Stop OFF being
tion: Depress the clutch pedal or
stop: displayed for
press the accelerator pedal - the
engine starts. Engage a suitable about 5 seconds - while the 03
ConditionsA M/AB gear and continue the journey. button's lamp goes out at the
same time.
Declutch, set the gear lever in M The following option is also avail- M
neutral position and release the The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
able on a downhill gradient:
clutch pedal - the engine is reactivated with the button or until the next
Release the foot brake and let the time the engine is started with the key.
switched off.
car move off - the engine starts
Stop the car with the foot brake A automatically when the speed
Limitations
and then keep your foot on the exceeds normal walking pace.
pedal - the engine stops automat- The engine does not auto-stop
Release the foot pressure on the A
ically. Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the
foot brake - the engine starts
engine does not stop automatically if:
A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox. automatically and the journey can
B M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
continue.
ConditionsA M/AB
The AUTO START symbol on A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
the information display illumi- the car has not achieved M+A
nates as verification and approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
reminder that the engine is pace) first after a key start or the
In certain situations, it may
has stopped automatically. last auto-stop.
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic the driver has opened the seat- M+A
Start/Stop function - this is belt's buckle.
carried out by pressing this
button once, at which point
the button's lamp goes out.
``

DRIVe Start/Stop*
ConditionsA M/AB ConditionsA M/AB The engine auto-starts

An engine that has stopped automatically may
the capacity of the battery is M+A the exhaust system's particulate M+A restart in some cases without the driver having
below the minimum permissible filter is full - the temporarily dis- decided that the journey should continue. In
level. engaged Start/Stop function is the following cases the engine also starts auto-
reactivated once an automatic matically if the driver has not depressed the
03 the engine does not have normal M+A cleaning cycle has been per- clutch pedal:
operating temperature. formed (see page 298).
outside temperature is below M+A the road is very steep. M+A ConditionsA M/AB
freezing point or above
approx. 30 °C. a trailer is connected electrically M+A Misting forms on the windows. M+A
to the car’s electrical system. The environment in the passen- M+A
the environment in the passenger M+A
compartment differs from the the atmospheric air pressure is A ger compartment deviates from
preset values - indicated by the less than equivalent to 1500-2000 the preset values.
ventilation fan running at a high metres above sea level - the cur- The outside temperature falls M+A
speed. rent air pressure varies with the below freezing point or exceeds
prevailing weather conditions. approx. 30 °C.
the car is reversed. M+A
adaptive cruise control Queue A There is a temporarily high cur- M+A
battery temperature is below M+A Assist is activated.
freezing point or above rent take-off or battery capacity
approx. 55 °C. the driver’s door has been A drops below the lowest permissi-
opened with the gear selector in ble level.
the driver makes greater steering M+A D position.
wheel movements. Repeated pumping of the brake M+A
pedal.
the gear selector is moved out of A
the D position to S positionC or The car starts to roll - faster than M
"+/-". the equivalent normal walking
A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
pace.
C Sport mode.

DRIVe Start/Stop*
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine

ConditionsA M/AB ConditionsA M/AB starts automatically.
The driver's belt lock is opened A A gear is engaged without M 2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set
with the gear selector in D or N declutching - a display text in neutral position. The information display
position. prompts the driver to set the gear then shows the text Put gear in neutral
lever in neutral position in order to
Steering wheel movements. A enable automatic starting. More information and settings 03
The gear selector is moved from A The driver is unrestrained, the A
the D position to "+/-" or R. gear selector is in P position and
The driver's door is opened with A the driver’s door is open - a nor-
the gear selector in D position - a mal engine start must take place.
"ping" sound and text message The gear selector is moved to P A
inform that the Start/Stop func- position - press the START/
tion is active. STOP ENGINE button to restart
A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox. the engine.
If the driver's door is opened
before starting the engine with
WARNING the START/STOP ENGINE but-
The MY CAR menu system in the car includes
Do not open the bonnet when the engine ton, the Start/Stop function is
instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe
has stopped automatically - the engine may switched off.
suddenly start automatically. First switch off concept along with several possible settings
the engine as normal using the START/ A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox. and options - see page 201.
STOP ENGINE button before opening the
bonnet.
Involuntary engine stop with manual
gearbox
The engine does not auto-start In the event that a start-up fails and the engine
In the following cases the engine does not stops, proceed as follows:
auto-start after having auto-stopped:

DRIVe Start/Stop*
Text message play text messages on the information display formed. The following table shows some
In combination with this indicator for certain situations. For some of them there examples.
lamp the Start/Stop function may dis- is a recommended action that should be per-
Symbol MessageA Info/Action M/AB

03
Auto Start-Stop ON Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been M+A
activated.
Auto Start-Stop OFF Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start/Stop has been M+A
switched off.
Auto Start-Stop serv. required Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an M+A
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out. M+A
AUTO- Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the M
STOP brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as M
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal M
to be depressed.
Depress the foot brake to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal M
to be depressed.
Press brake and clutch to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or M
clutch pedal to be depressed.

DRIVe Start/Stop*
Symbol MessageA Info/Action M/AB

Put gear in neutral Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the M
gear lever in neutral position.
AUTO- Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the A
STOP brake pedal to be released. 03
Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to A
N or P position and start the engine as normal with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as A
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear
selector in P or N.
A The XC60 only has Start/Stop on manual gearbox.
If a message does not go out following com-

pletion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.

All-wheel drive – AWD*
All Wheel Drive is always available
03
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all

four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An elec-
tronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best grip
on the current road surface. This provides the
best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of
power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.

Foot brake
General may be felt in the brake pedal when this is Cleaning the brake discs
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If engaged and this is normal. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
one brake circuit is damaged then this will A short test of the ABS system is made auto- may result in delayed brake function. This delay
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level matically after the engine has been started is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to when the driver releases the brake pedal. A Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-
produce the normal braking effect. further automatic test of the ABS system may faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The car has been washed. Carry this out by braking 03
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo. test may be experienced as pulses in the brake gently during a short period while en route.
pedal.
Emergency Brake Assistance
WARNING Emergency brake lights and automatic Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency
The brake servo only works when the engine hazard warning flashers Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and
is running. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The driver's braking style and increases brake force
If the brake is used when the engine is switched function means that the brake light flashes as necessary. The brake force can be rein-
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force instead of - as in normal braking - shining with forced up to the level when the ABS system is
must be used to brake the car. a constant glow. engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when
the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy Emergency brake lights are activated at
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used working and/or in the event of sudden braking. NOTE
if the same gear is used downhill as up. After the car's speed has been slowed below When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
For more general information on heavy loads the normal constant glow - while at the same the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
on the car, see page 378. time the hazard warning flashers are activated, brake pedal is released then all braking
and they flash until the driver changes engine ceases.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
Braking System) which prevents the wheels deactivated with their button, see page 92. Maintenance
from locking during braking. This means the To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
133
Foot brake
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see WARNING

page 332.
If and illuminate at the same
IMPORTANT time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
tem.
The wear on the brake system's compo-
nents must be checked regularly. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-
03 mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near-
Contact a workshop for information about est workshop and have the brake system
the procedure or engage a workshop to checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is
carry out the inspection - an authorised recommended.
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
Symbols in the combined instrument before topping up the brake fluid.
panel The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
Symbol Specification be investigated.
Constant glow – Check the

brake fluid level. If the level is
low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds

when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.
134
HDC Hill Descent Control
General WARNING gear position 1 must be selected, which is

HDC can be compared to an automatic engine shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer
HDC does not work in all situations, but is display, see page 122.
brake. When you release the accelerator on instead only intended to be supplementary
downhill gradients the car is normally braked assistance.
by means of the engine striving for low engine NOTE
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But HDC cannot be activated in an automatic
that the car is driven safely.
the steeper the road and the more load there is gearbox with the gear selector in position 03
in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine D.
braking. In order to then reduce speed the Function
driver has to assist using the footbrake.
The function makes it possible to increase/ Operation
reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within
accelerator pedal decreases and becomes the gear's speed register can be selected using
more precise by means of the full actuation of the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator
the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to
speed within a limited range. The brake system 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the
brakes itself and provides the car with a low hill's gradient and without the need for the foot-
and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully brake.
focus on steering. The brake lights come on automatically when
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients the function is operating. The driver can brake
HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch
with an uneven road surface and slippery sec- or stop the car at any time by using the foot-
on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the
tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer brake.
button illuminates when the function is
from a ramp. switched on. When HDC is operating the HDC is deactivated:
symbol illuminates and the display
shows Hill descent control ON.
The function only operates in first gear position
and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,
135
HDC Hill Descent Control
• with the on/off button on the centre con-

sole
• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
manual gearbox
• if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
03 is moved to position D.
The function can be disengaged at any time. If
it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then
the braking effect will not release directly, but
slowly instead.
NOTE
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation
and engine response.
136
Parking brake
General Applying the parking brake the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking
is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds
above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the
braking procedure. 03
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Parking brake control - apply.
Function • Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrical parking brake is being applied. 2. Press the control. WARNING
The noise can also be heard during the auto- > The combined instrument panel symbol Always apply the parking brake when park-
matic function checking of the parking brake. starts flashing - once there is a ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in
If the car is stationary when the parking brake constant glow it is applied. P if it has automatic transmission, is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situation.
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
If it is applied when the car is moving then the sure that the car is at a standstill position.
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes over • When parking the vehicle, always engage
to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta- 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
tionary. gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Low battery voltage In an emergency the parking brake can be
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-
brake can neither be released nor applied. ing the control. When the control is released or
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 119.
137
Parking brake
Disengaging the parking brake NOTE Releasing automatically

1. Put the seatbelt on.
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal 2. Start the engine.
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom-
mends the use of the brake pedal. 3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
03 and depress the accelerator.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine. > The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol
2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
goes out.
3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-
erator.
NOTE
Parking brake control - release. > The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel symbol For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
Cars with manual gearbox released automatically if the engine is run-
goes out. ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The
Releasing manually parking brake is released immediately on
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition Cars with automatic gearbox cars with automatic gearbox when the
switch.1 Releasing manually accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch1.
3. Pull the control. Heavy load uphill
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
> The parking brake releases and the A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
combined instrument panel symbol 3. Pull the control. car to roll backward when the parking brake is
goes out. > The parking brake releases and the released automatically on a steep incline.
combined instrument panel symbol Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
ing off. Release the control when the engine
goes out.
achieves traction.
1 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
138
Parking brake
Replacing the brake linings parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop

The rear brake linings must be replaced at a is recommended.
workshop due to the design of the electric

03
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
"Message" Read the message on the information display.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message
on the information display.
Park brake not fully A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released - Try to apply and release the brake.
released If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
``
139
Parking brake

Parking brake not applied A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied - Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
03 The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed
with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally
disengaged.
Parking brake Service A fault has arisen - Try to apply and release the brake.
required If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
• If the car has to be parked before the fault

has been rectified then the wheels must be
turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear
engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear
selector must be in position P (automatic
gearbox).
140
HomeLink *
General WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If HomeLink is used to operate a
NOTE
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the door In certain vehicles the ignition must be
or gate while it is moving. switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink can be programmed or
• The car should remain outside the
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the 03
garage while a garage door opener is remote control that shall be replaced by
being programmed.
HomeLink for faster programming and
• Do not use HomeLink for any garage improved transmission of the radio signal.
door that does not have safety stop and The HomeLink buttons should be reset
safety reverse. before programming. When this has been
done HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and
ready for programming.
Save the original remote controls for future
HomeLink1 is a programmable remote control
programming (e.g. when changing to another
which can remotely control up to three different 1. Aim the original remote control towards the
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also rec-
devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys- HomeLink button to be programmed and
ommended that the programming for the but-
tem, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.) hold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do not
tons is deleted when the car is sold. See the
and in doing so replace their remote controls. obstruct the indicator lamp on
section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on
For more information on HomeLink, visit: HomeLink.
page 142.
www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone 2. Depress the button on the original remote
number, +49 6838 907 277). control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. Both the buttons must be released
when the indicator lamp flashes quickly.
1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

HomeLink *
3. Depress the HomeLink button being 5. Depress and release the receiver's "pro- If programming problems persist, contact
programmed, hold it depressed for gramming button". The button flashes for HomeLink on: www.homelink.com or ring
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if approx. 30 seconds and the next step must 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
necessary until the garage door is acti- be carried out within this period. number +49 6838 907 277).
vated. If the door is not activated, press the 6. While the receiver's "programming button"
programmed HomeLink button and hold is still flashing, press the button on Resetting the HomeLink buttons
03 it depressed and check the indicator lamp. HomeLink being programmed and hold it It is only possible to reset all of the
> Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- depressed for approx. 2 seconds and then HomeLink buttons at the same time, not each
minates with a constant glow when the release it. Repeat the press/hold/release button individually. However, individual but-
button is kept depressed, this indicates sequence up to 3 times to conclude the tons can be reprogrammed, see the following
that the programming is complete. programming. section "Programming individual buttons".
The garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the pro- 1. Depress the two outer buttons on
Operation HomeLink and do not release until the
grammed HomeLink button is
depressed. When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be indicator lamp starts to flash.
used in place of the separate original remote
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp controls. 2. Release the buttons.
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds > HomeLink is now set in so-called
and then changes over to a constant Press the programmed button and hold it
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprog-
glow. In which case, continue with the depressed until the garage door, alarm system,
rammed, see section "Programming
programming steps 4-6 in order to com- etc. is activated (may take several seconds).
HomeLink®" on page 141.
plete the programming of a device with Naturally the original remote controls can still
rolling code (usually a garage door be used in parallel with HomeLink if required.
opener).
NOTE
4. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example, If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will
normally located close to the antenna's work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
bracket on the receiver. has been opened.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

HomeLink *
Programming individual buttons

To reprogram an individual HomeLink button,
proceed as follows:
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink 03
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
start with step 1 in section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 141.
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLink, visit: www.homelink.com or
ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).

DSTC – Stability and traction control system....................................... 146
Road sign information - RSI*................................................................ 148
Cruise control*...................................................................................... 150
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 152
Distance Warning*................................................................................. 162
City Safety™......................................................................................... 165
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*............... 170
Driver Alert System*.............................................................................. 178
Driver Alert System - DAC*................................................................... 179
Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 182
Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 185
Park assist camera*.............................................................................. 188
G000000
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 191

DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
General information on DSTC engine braking when driving in low gears on skidding with the rear section up to a certain
The stability and traction control system, DSTC slippery road surfaces. level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
(Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps the Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's amongst other things, impair the driver's ability the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system
traction. to steer the car. intervenes and stabilises the car.
The activation of the system during braking With Sport mode, maximum traction is
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
The function serves to stabilise the car and
may accelerate slower than expected when the driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
accelerator pedal is depressed. snow.
page 310.
04 Active Yaw Control Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
The function limits the driving and brake force NOTE 1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise The function is deactivated if the driver and search in the display screen's menu
the car. selects Sport mode. system and locate My XC60 DSTC. (For
Spin Control information on the menu system, see
The function prevents the driving wheels from page 200).
Operation
spinning against the road surface during accel- 2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu
eration. Selection of level - Sport mode system with EXIT.
The DSTC system is always activated - it can- > The system then allows a more sporty
Traction control system not be deactivated.
The function is active at low speed and trans- driving style.
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- However, the driver can select the Sport mode, The Sport mode is active until the driver dese-
ning to the one that is not. which allows for a more active driving experi- lects it or until the engine is switched off - after
ence. In Sport mode the system detects the engine is started the next time the DSTC
Engine drag control - EDC whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel system is back in its normal mode again.
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- movements and cornering are more active than
tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or in normal driving and then allows controlled

04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system

Symbol Message Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reac-
tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged.

• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message" There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it! 04
and
Constant glow for 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.
Sport mode is activated.
147
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
General information on RSI WARNING Together with the symbol for

the current speed limit, a sign
RSI does not work in all situations but is showing that overtaking is
designed merely as a supplementary aid. prohibited may also be dis-
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- played where appropriate.
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed. Additional signs
Operation
04
Examples of readable speed signs1.

The Road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which road signs the car has passed through
information on - among other things - the cur-
rent speed, the start/end of a motorway or
road, and when overtaking is prohibited. Examples of additional signs1.
If a sign for both a motorway/road for motor- Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-
ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum ted for the same road - an additional sign then
Recorded speed information.
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to indicates the circumstances under which the
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted When RSI has recorded a road sign with an different speeds apply. The road section may
speed. imposed speed, the sign is displayed as a sym- be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
bol on the instrument panel. and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1 Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market - the illustration only shows a few examples.

04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
The speed applicable on an The instrument panel’s speed symbol display Here are several examples of what can disrupt
exit is indicated by means of can be disabled. To deactivate the RSI func- the function:
an additional sign containing tion:
an arrow. The arrow is dis-
• Faded signs
played under the symbol
• Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings • Signs positioned on bends
Car settings Road Sign
showing the speed.
Information and go back by pressing
• Rotated or damaged signs
Speed signs linked to this type of additional EXIT, see page 201. • Concealed or poorly positioned signs.
sign are displayed only if the driver is using the
Speed warning • Signs completely or partly covered with
direction indicator. frost, snow and/or dirt.
The driver can opt to receive a warning (Speed
Limited distance or time of day Alert) when the applicable speed limit is excee-
ded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given 04
Some speeds are applicable
only after a specific distance by the symbol showing the applicable maxi-
or at a certain time of day. The mum speed temporarily flashing when this
driver's attention is drawn to speed is exceeded.
the situation by means of an To activate speed warning:
empty frame under the sym-
bol showing the speed. • Check speed warning in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert
Setting in MY CAR and go back by pressing EXIT, see
page 201.
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited -
just like the human eye. Find out more about
this on page 175.
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
Options in MY CAR. function.

04 Driver support
Cruise control*
General information on CC Operation To activate cruise control:

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps • At the required speed - press the steering
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in wheel button or .
a more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows. > Current speed is stored in the memory - the
display text (---) km/h changes to show
the selected speed, e.g. 100 km/h, without
WARNING
brackets.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene NOTE
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
04 suitable speed and/or suitable distance. Cruise control cannot be engaged at
G021411
speeds below 30 km/h.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely. Steering wheel keypad and display.
Changing the speed
Cruise control - On/Off. To change the stored speed:
Standby mode ceases and the stored • Press briefly on the steering wheel button,
speed is resumed. or - most recent presses are stored
Standby mode in memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
Activate and adjust the speed.
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
mode). to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control: NOTE
• Press the steering wheel button (1). If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
down for more than approx. 1 minute, it is
> The symbol illuminates in the display (5) blocked and disabled. To be able to reacti-
and the brackets around (---) km/h show vate Cruise Control, the car must be stop-
that cruise control is set in standby mode. ped and the engine restarted.

04 Driver support
Cruise control*
Temporary deactivation - standby mode NOTE

To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode: A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with .
• Press the steering wheel button .
> Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis- Deactivate
play (5), e.g. (100) km/h. The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
Automatic standby mode engine - the set speed is deleted from the
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
memory and cannot be resumed with the
set in standby mode if:
button. 04
• wheels lose traction
• the foot brake is used
• speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
• the clutch pedal is depressed
• the gear selector is moved to neutral posi-
tion (automatic gearbox)
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed

Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated
with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.

04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
General information on ACC WARNING Function

The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
The driver must always be observant with
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
distance from the vehicle ahead. An adaptive when the adaptive cruise control is not
cruise control provides a more relaxing driving maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis-
experience on long journeys on motorways tance.
and long straight main roads in smooth traffic The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
flows. all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver sets the desired speed and time Read the whole of this section for informa-
interval to the car in front. When the radar tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
04 detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the control. The driver must be familiar with this
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. information before using the adaptive cruise
When the road is clear again the car returns to control.
the selected speed. The driver always bears responsibility for Function overview1.
maintaining the correct distance and speed, Warning lamp - braking by driver required
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or even when the adaptive cruise control is
set to the standby mode and the car comes too being used. Steering wheel keypad
close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned by Distance Warning (see page 162) Radar sensor
about the short distance. IMPORTANT Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control control system and a coordinated spacing sys-
components must only be performed at a tem.
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assistant, see page 156.
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

04 Driver support
WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval cruise control capacity and the driver does not
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see brake, then the cruise control uses the collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter- any vehicle in front then the car will instead warning system's warning lamp and warning
vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
in front. maintain the cruise control's set speed. This sound (see page 170) to alert the driver that
also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front immediate intervention is required.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. The adaptive cruise control aims to control the NOTE
Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- speed in a smooth way. In situations that The warning lamp may be difficult to notice
cles and objects. demand sudden braking the driver must brake in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for himself/herself. This applies with large differ- being worn. 04
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at ences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor,
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ braking may come unexpectedly or not at all,
WARNING
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or see page 158. Cruise control only warns of vehicles
on slip roads. detected by the radar sensor. Consequently
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to there may be no warning or it may be sub-
follow another vehicle at speeds from ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control 30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls brake when it is necessary.
regulates the speed with acceleration and below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low too low, the cruise control is set in standby Steep roads and/or heavy load
sound when they are being used by the Adap- mode at which automatic braking ceases - the
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
tive cruise control. driver must then take over himself/herself to
primarily intended for use when driving on level
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
road surfaces. It may have difficultly in keeping
WARNING Warning lamp - braking by driver the correct distance from the vehicle ahead
when driving on steep roads, with a heavy load
The brake pedal moves when the cruise required
or with a trailer - in which case, be extra atten-
control brakes. Do not rest your foot under Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
the brake pedal as it could become trapped. tive and ready to slow down.
that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
2 Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 156.

04 Driver support
Operation • Press the steering wheel button - If speed is increased using the accelerator
the symbol illuminates in the display. pedal prior to pressing the / button,
The display's symbol (---) shows that the then it is the car's current speed when the
cruise control is set in standby mode. button is pressed that is stored in the
To activate the Cruise control: cruise control.
• At the desired speed - press the steering • In active mode the button has the same
wheel button or . function as but results in a lower
increase in speed: + 1 km/h.
> The current speed is stored in the memory
- the display's symbol (---) changes to NOTE
04 show the selected speed, e.g. 100, without If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
brackets. down for more than approx. 1 minute, it is
When the symbol changes blocked and disabled. To be able to reacti-
Steering wheel keypad and display. vate Cruise Control, the car must be stop-
to the radar sensor has ped and the engine restarted.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed. detected a vehicle.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode. Only when the symbol be activated. Then the display shows
(with car) is illuminated, is the Cruise control Unavailable, see
Time interval - Increase/decrease. page 160.
distance to the vehicle in
Activate and adjust the speed. front regulated by the cruise control.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby Changing the speed

mode). To change the stored speed:
Time interval3 - On (during adjustment). • Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
Time interval - On (after adjustment).
presses made are stored in the memory.
Activating and setting the speed
To set the Cruise control:
3 The display shows either "dash" symbol [6] or [7] - they are never shown simultaneously.

04 Driver support
Set time interval The number of lines for the Standby mode due to driver intervention
Different time intervals to the selected time interval is Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
vehicle in front can be shown during the setting itself set in standby mode if:
selected and shown in the and for several seconds after-
display as 1-5 horizontal lines wards. Then a smaller scale • the foot brake is used
- the more lines the longer the version of the symbol is • the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
time interval. One line corre- shown to the right of the dis- than 1 minute4
sponds to approx. 1 second play. The same symbol is also shown when • the gear selector is moved to N position
to the vehicle in front, 5 lines Distance Warning is activated, see page 162. (automatic gearbox)
approx. 3 seconds. • the driver maintains a speed higher than
To set/change the time interval: NOTE the set speed for longer than 1 minute. 04
Only use the time intervals permitted by The driver must then regulate the speed.
• Increase or decrease with the steering local traffic regulations.
wheel buttons / . A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
If Cruise Control does not appear to react erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
At low speed, when the distances are short, the when activated, this may be because the
adaptive cruise control increases the time affect the cruise control setting - the car returns
time distance to the car in front is preventing
interval slightly. to the last stored speed when the accelerator
an increase in speed.
pedal is released.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations lated distance in metres for a given time Automatic standby mode
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in interval. The Adaptive cruise control is dependent on
front smoothly and comfortably. other systems, e.g.. DSTC (see page 146). If
Temporary deactivation - standby mode any of these systems stop working then cruise
Note that small intervals only allow the driver a
To temporarily disengage Cruise control and control is automatically deactivated.
short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise. set it in standby mode: In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
• Press the steering wheel button . will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver
> Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis- must then intervene and adapt the speed and
play, e.g. (100) distance to the vehicle ahead.
4 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

04 Driver support
An automatic deactivation can be due to: Note that the lowest programmable speed for
WARNING the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the
• engine speed is too low/high
cruise control is capable of following another
• speed falls below 30 km/h5 Be aware that this function can be activated vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed
in more situations other than during over-
• wheels lose traction taking, e.g. when a direction indicator is cannot be selected.
• brake temperature is high used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
Extended speed range
another road - the car will then accelerate
• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
briefly.
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
NOTE
Resume set speed Deactivate In order to activate the cruise control the
04 Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated Adaptive cruise control is deactivated with a driver's door must be closed and the driver
with one press on the steering wheel button short press on the steering wheel button in must be wearing the seatbelt.
- the speed is then set to the last stored standby mode - or with one long press in active
speed. mode. The set speed is cleared and cannot be With automatic gearbox the cruise control can
resumed with the button. follow another vehicle within the range of
NOTE 0-200 km/h.
A significant increase in speed may arise Queue Assistant
after the speed has been resumed with .
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise
control is supplemented with the Queue Assis- Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
Overtaking another vehicle tant function (also referred to as "Queue reasonable distance.
When the car is following another vehicle and Assist").
the driver indicates an imminent overtake with Queue Assistant has the following functions: For shorter stops in connection with inching in
the direction indicator6, the Cruise control
• Extended speed range - also below 30 km/ slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto-
helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the
h and at standstill matically resumed if the stops do not exceed
vehicle in front.
about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
The function is active at speeds
• Change of target
car in front starts moving again then the cruise
above 70 km/h. • Automatic braking ceases when stationary control is set in standby mode with automatic
• Automatic activation parking brake.
5 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
6 On left flash only in left-hand drive car, or right flash in right-hand drive car.

04 Driver support
braking. The driver must then re-activate the Change of target Automatic standby mode with change of
cruise control in one of the following ways: target
• Press the steering wheel button . Cruise control is disengaged and set in
standby mode:
or
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise
• Depress the accelerator pedal. control is not sure whether the target
object is a stationary vehicle or some other
> The cruise control will then resume follow-
object, e.g. a speed bump.
ing the vehicle in front.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con-
NOTE If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then 04
there may be stationary traffic in front.
trol no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary for
When the cruise control is following another Termination of automatic braking at a
a maximum of 4 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and Cruise Control is dis- vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes standstill
engaged. target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the In certain situations Queue Assist automati-
cruise control will slow down for the stationary cally interrupts braking when stationary. This
• The driver has to release the parking
vehicle. means that the brakes are released and the car
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated. may start to roll - the driver must therefore
WARNING intervene and brake the car himself/herself in
order to maintain its position.
When the cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets
the target is changed from a moving vehicle cruise control in standby mode in the following
to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will situations:
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
select the stored speed. • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
• The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake. • the parking brake is applied
• the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
• the driver sets the cruise control in standby
mode.

04 Driver support
Automatic activation parking brake WARNING WARNING

In some situations Queue Assist applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car station- The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene avoidance system. The driver must inter-
ary. when the adaptive cruise control is not vene if the system does not detect a vehicle
This takes place if: maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- in front.
tance.
• the driver opens the door or takes off his/ The adaptive cruise control does not brake
her seatbelt The adaptive cruise control cannot handle for humans or animals, and not for small
all traffic, weather and road conditions. vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles.
• DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
mode Read the whole of this section for informa-
cles and objects.
tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise
04 • Queue Assist has held the car stationary control. The driver must be familiar with this Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
for more than 4 minutes information before using the adaptive cruise example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
• the engine is switched off control. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
• the brakes have overheated. The driver always bears responsibility for
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
on slip roads.
even when the adaptive cruise control is
The radar sensor and its limitations being used.
The radar sensor is used - apart from by Adap- The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-
tive cruise control - by the following functions cles in front is reduced significantly:
WARNING
as well: • if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
• Collision Warning with Auto Brake, see iary lamps must not be installed in front of
page 170 rain or slush, or if other objects have col-
the grille.
lected in front of the radar sensor.
• Distance Warning, see page 162.
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in NOTE
the same lane. Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see "Maintenance" on page 173.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in
it being illegal to use.
• if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.

04 Driver support
Examples where the cruise control does Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
not work optimally detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In a vehicle that drives in between the car and
some situations another vehicle is not vehicles in front.
detected, or the detection is made later than Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
expected. vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane
can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
04
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the
radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked
and that vehicles in front of the car could not
be detected.
This means that in addition to the Adaptive
Cruise Control, Distance Warning and Collision
Warning with Auto Brake functions are not
operating either.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
ACC field of vision.
``

04 Driver support
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or
snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy
nals. road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no
longer blocked.
04

Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Time interval activated, during adjustment.
Time interval activated, after adjustment.
DSTC Normal to enable Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) has
Cruise been set in Normal mode - see page 146.
Cruise control Cancelled Adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.

04 Driver support

Cruise control Unavailable Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual Adaptive cruise control temporarily disengaged.
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. 04
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 158.
Cruise control Service Adaptive cruise control disengaged.

required
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press Brake To hold + The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to
acoustic alarm take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assistant) • The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Only fol- Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
lowing within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
(Only with Queue Assistant)

04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
General NOTE Some combinations of the selected equipment

Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
Distance warning is deactivated during the console - in which case the function is handled
that informs the driver about the time interval time the adaptive cruise control is active.
to vehicles in front. by the car's menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Warning
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
WARNING distance. For a description of the menu sys-
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
tem - see page 200.
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the distance
tance information is provided for oncoming, to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre-
set value - the speed of the driver's vehicle
Set time interval
slow or stationary vehicles.
is not affected.
04
Operation
Controls and display for time interval.

Orange warning lamp1. Time interval - Increase/decrease. Press
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu- up to increase, down to decrease.
minates with a constant glow if the distance to Time interval2 - On (during adjustment).
the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time Press the button in the centre console to switch
interval. Time interval2 - On (after adjustment).
the function on or off. The function is switched
on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
2 The display shows either "dash" symbol [2] or [3] - they are never shown simultaneously.

04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Different time intervals to the NOTE Limitations

vehicle in front can be The function uses the same radar sensor as
selected and shown in the The higher the speed, the longer the calcu-
lated distance in metres for a specific time adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-
display as 1-5 horizontal lines ing system. For more information on the radar
interval.
- the more lines the longer the sensor and its limitations, see page 158.
time interval. One line corre- The set time interval is also used by the
sponds to adaptive cruise control function, see
page 154. NOTE
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds. Only use the time interval that is allowed in Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
accordance with local traffic regulations. tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
The number of lines for the sunglasses, could mean that the warning
selected time interval is light in the windscreen cannot be seen. 04
shown during the setting itself Poor weather or winding roads could affect
and for several seconds after- the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-
wards. Then a smaller scale cles in front.
version of the symbol is
The size of other vehicles could also affect
shown to the right of the dis- detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
play. The same symbol is also shown when could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
adaptive cruise control is activated. nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.

04 Driver support
Distance Warning*

Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush
04 has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warn. Service Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
General If the car is also equipped with a Collision Function

City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
to avoid a collision when driving in queues, systems complement each other. For more
amongst other things, when changes in the information on Collision Warning function with
traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten- Auto Brake, see page 170.
tion, could lead to an incident.
IMPORTANT
The function is active at speeds
under50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto- Maintenance and replacement of City
matically braking the car in the event of immi- Safety™ components must only be per-
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. 04
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where WARNING
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.
the driver should have started braking earlier, City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
which is why it cannot help the driver in every situations or traffic, weather or road condi- City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
situation. tions. car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of
the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as City Safety™ does not react to vehicles collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles the car, which may be experienced as sudden
intervention. braking.
or to humans and animals.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse City Safety™ can prevent collision at a If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do higher speed difference, it is only possible completely prevent a collision.
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
later. full brake function, the driver must depress City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
the brake pedal. and stops the car in normal circumstances, just
The driver or passengers normally only notice behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for main- is well outside normal driving style and may be
is extremely close to being in a collision. experienced as being uncomfortable.
taining the proper distance and speed.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
If the difference in speed between the vehicles • Using MY CAR on the centre console dis- Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety™ may play screen with its menu system, search projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-
not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain and locate Settings Car settings ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the
full brake force, the driver must depress the Driver support systems City Safety. bonnet limit the function.
brake pedal. This could then make it possible Select the Off option. For more information The laser light from the sensor in City
to prevent a collision, even at speed differen- on the menu system MY CAR, see Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
ces above 15 km/h. page 200. The sensor cannot detect objects with low
When the function is activated and brakes, the However, the function will be enabled the reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
instrument panel display shows a message to next time the engine is started, regardless vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
the effect that the function is/has been active. of whether the system was enabled or dis- thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec-
04 abled when the engine was switched off. tors.
NOTE On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
The brake lights come on when City WARNING is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
Safety™ brakes the car. The laser sensor also transmits laser light City Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such sit-
when City Safety™ is disabled manually. uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro-
vide best possible braking force with main-
Operation tained stability.
To enable City Safety™ again:
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
NOTE • Follow the same procedure as for disa-
bling, but select the On option. is temporarily deactivated.
The City Safety™ function is always ena- City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
bled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 78 on key Limitations under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
positions). not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
when parking.
On and Off the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable Driver commands are always prioritised, which
However, the sensor has limitations and has
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could is why City Safety™ does not intervene in sit-
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen. uations where the driver is steering or acceler-
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms
ating in a clear manner, even if a collision is
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be or snow flurries. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the
unavoidable.
deactivated as follows: windscreen may disrupt the function.
166
04 Driver support
City Safety™
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision The Windscreen Sensors blocked message IMPORTANT
with a stationary object the car remains sta- is not shown for all situations in which the laser
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, in the windscreen in front of either of the
diligent about keeping the windscreen and
laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a
then speed is reduced to the same speed as area in front of the laser sensor clean. surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger),
that maintained by the vehicle in front. then a workshop must be contacted for
The following table presents possible causes
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops for the message being shown, along with sug- repair or replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location, page
when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless gestions for appropriate action.
165) - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal ommended.
beforehand. Cause Action Failure to take action may result in reduced
04
performance for City Safety™.
NOTE The windscreen sur- Clean the wind-
face in front of the screen surface in To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™
• Keep the windscreen surface in front of laser sensor is dirty front of the sensor performance the following also applies:
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and or covered with ice from dirt, ice and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- • Before replacing a windscreen, contact
or snow. snow. an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
tion, page 165).
that the correct windscreen is ordered
• Do not affix or mount anything on the The laser sensor Remove the block- and fitted. Using the wrong windscreen
windscreen in front of the laser sensor field of vision is ing object. may result in the City Safety function
• Remove ice and snow from the bonnet blocked. failing to operate or operating incor-
- snow and ice must not exceed a height rectly.
of 5 cm. • The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during
Fault tracing and action replacement.
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play, it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
167
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Laser sensor For more information on the laser sensor, see

The City Safety™ function includes a sensor page 9.
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser Symbols and messages in the display
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo In conjunction with automatic braking by the
workshop is recommended. City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate on the instrument panel and a
WARNING message may appear on its display.
Never look into the laser sensor (which A text message can be acknowledged by
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at briefly pressing the OK button on the direction
04 a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni-
indicator stalk.
fying optics such as a magnifying glass,
microscope, lens or similar optical instru-
ments - this would involve a risk of eye injury
(the illustration on page 165 shows sensor
location).
168
04 Driver support
City Safety™

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
blocked
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 166. 04
City Safety Service City Safety™ is not operational.

required
169
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
General Two system levels Function

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- Depending on how the car equipped, the Col-
trian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver lision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
when there is a risk of colliding with a pedes- Detection function may appear in two variants:
trian or vehicle in front that is stationary or Level 1 and Level 2.
moving in the same direction. Level 1
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian The driver is merely warned of occurring obsta-
Detection is activated in situations where the cles by means of visual and acoustic signals -
driver should have started braking earlier, no automatic braking intervenes, the driver
which is why it cannot help the driver in every must himself brake.
04 situation. Level 2
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
Detection is designed to be activated as late as means of visual and acoustic signals - the car Function overview1.
possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter- is braked automatically if the driver himself
vention. does not act within a reasonable time. Audio-visual warning signal in the event of
a collision risk.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
IMPORTANT Radar sensor2
Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the
collision speed. Maintenance of components included in Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian trian Detection must only be carried out in a Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
Detection must not be used as an excuse for workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop three steps in the following order:
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the is recommended.
driver solely relies on Collision Warning with 1. Collision warning
Auto Brake to do the braking, there will be a 2. Brake support2
collision sooner or later. 3. Auto Brake2
2 With system Level 2 only.

04 Driver support
The collision warning system and City 3 - Auto Brake2 WARNING

Safety™ complement each other. For more The automatic brake function is activated last.
information on City Safety™, see page 165. The collision warning system does not
If in this situation the driver has not yet started engage in all driving situations or traffic,
1 - Collision warning to take evasive action and the risk of collision weather or road conditions. The collision
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- is imminent then the automatic braking func- warning system does not react to vehicles
tion is deployed - this takes place irrespective driving in another direction to the car or to
nent collision. animals.
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
The collision warning system detects pedes- then takes place with full brake force in order Warning only activated in the event of a high
trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake risk for collision. This section "Function"
driving in the same direction in front of the car. force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. and the section "Limitations" inform about
limitations that the driver must be aware of
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or 04
before using the Collision Warning system
a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted with with Auto Brake.
a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in the illus-
Warnings and brake interventions for
tration on page 170) and an acoustic signal.
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
2 - Brake support2
If the risk of collision has increased further after Warnings and brake interventions for
the collision warning then the brake support is pedestrians do not work in darkness and
activated. tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a col-
This means that the brake system is prepared lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, full brake performance, the driver should
which may feel like a slight jolt. always depress the brake pedal - even when
the car auto-brakes.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented. Never wait for a collision warning. The driver
is always responsible that the correct dis-
Brake support also reinforces the driver's brak- tance and speed are maintained - even
ing if the system considers that the braking is when the collision warning system with
not sufficient to avoid a collision. auto-brake is used.
2 With system Level 2 only.

04 Driver support
Detection of pedestrians • In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/ Operation

she must appear full-length and have a Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre
height of at least 80 cm. console display screen and menu system. For
• The system cannot detect a pedestrian information on how the menu system is used,
carrying larger items. see page 200.
• The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like NOTE
the human eye.
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-
• The camera sensor's capacity to detect tions are always enabled - they cannot be
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in deactivated.
04 darkness and tunnels - even when street-
lights are lit.
On and Off
Optimal examples of what the system regards as To select whether the collision warning system
pedestrians with clear body contours. WARNING should be switched on or off:
Optimal performance of the system requires Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- • Use the menu system MY CAR via the
that the system function that detects pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool. centre console display to search for
trians receives as unambiguous information as This function cannot detect all pedestrians Settings Car settings Driver
possible about the contours of the body - this in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti- support systems Collision Warning -
implies the opportunity to identify the head, ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth-
there, select On or Off.
arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body ing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm. An activated function is tested every time the
combined with a normal human pattern of
engine is started by briefly illuminating the sep-
movement. • The driver is always responsible that the
arate lights for the warning lamp (no. [1] in the
vehicle is driven properly and with a
If large parts of the body are not visible to the safety distance adapted to the speed. illustration on page 170).
camera then the system cannot detect a
When starting the engine, the setting that was
pedestrian.
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.

04 Driver support
Activating/deactivating warning signals uations, then change to warning distance WARNING

The warning lamp (no. [1] in the illustration on Normal.
page 170) is activated automatically when the No automatic system can guarantee
Only use warning distance Short in excep- 100 % correct function in all situations.
engine is started if Collision Warning is ena- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving. Therefore, never test the Auto Brake system
bled. by driving at people or vehicles - this may
The warning sound can be activated/deacti- cause severe damage and injury and risk
NOTE
vated separately: lives.
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
• Select On or Off in the menu system MY the warning lamp and warning sound will be
Checking settings
CAR under Settings Car settings used by the cruise control even if the colli-
sion warning system is switched off. The settings required can be controlled on the
Driver support systems Collision centre console display screen. Search with the 04
Warning Warning sound. The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
Set warning distance the function cannot shorten driver reaction settings Driver support systems
time. Collision Warning, see page 200.
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with the Distance Maintenance
deployed.
Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see
• Select one of the options from Long, page 162.
Normal or Short in the menu system MY
CAR under Settings Car settings
NOTE
Driver support systems Collision
Warning Warning distance. Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
The warning distance determines the system's late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an large differences in speed or if vehicles in
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this front brake heavily.
setting produces too many warnings, which
could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-
Camera and radar sensor3.

04 Driver support
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be NOTE WARNING

kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo. The visual warning signal can be temporarily Warnings and brake interventions could be
disengaged in the event of high passenger implemented late or not at all if the traffic
compartment temperature caused by situation or external influences mean that
NOTE strong sunlight for example. If this occurs the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will then the warning sound is activated even if pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
reduce their function and may prevent it is deactivated in the menu system.
The sensor system has a limited range for
measurement. • Warnings may not appear if the dis- pedestrians and the system therefore pro-
tance to the vehicle in front is small or if vides effective warnings and brake inter-
steering wheel and pedal movements ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
Limitations are large, e.g. a very active driving style. For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
04
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes- warnings and brake interventions are effec-
tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
trian Detection is active from approx. 4 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustra- vehicles could be disengaged due to dark-
tion on page 170) may be difficult to notice in ness or poor visibility.
the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when
Warnings and brake interventions for
sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
looking straight ahead. The warning sound speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance The collision warning system uses the same
is extended, which may reduce the capacity to radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS more information on the radar sensor and its
and DSTC systems will provide best possible limitations, see page 175.
braking force with maintained stability.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This then leads to the system provid-
ing a warning at a later stage, which reduces
the total number of warnings; see the section
"Set warning distance" on page 173.

04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- • Driver Alert Control – see page 179 after the engine is started in order to protect
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged. • Lane Departure Warning – see page 182. camera functionality.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- Fault tracing and action
vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is NOTE If the display shows the message Windscreen
why the system does not intervene in situations Keep the windscreen surface in front of the Sensors blocked then this means that the
where the car is approaching a vehicle in front camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect
very slowly, e.g. when parking. and dirt. pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front
In situations where the driver demonstrates Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- of the car.
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision screen in front of the camera sensor, as this
At the same time, this means that - besides
warning may be postponed slightly in order to could reduce or prevent the function of one
or more camera-dependent systems. Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto- 04
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum. matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
The camera sensors have limitations similar to Departure Warning functions will not have full
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark- functionality either.
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car
ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for
is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, The following table presents possible causes
example. Under such conditions the functions
then speed is reduced to the same speed as for a message being shown along with the
of camera-dependent systems could be sig-
that maintained by the vehicle in front. appropriate action.
nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
road surfaces or unclear lane markings could
beforehand.
also significantly reduce camera sensor func-
Camera sensor limitations tion when it is used to scan the carriageway
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
the functions: ited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles
• Automatic main/dipped beam dimming - cannot be detected in some situations, or they
see page 88 are detected later than anticipated.
• Road sign information - see page 148 During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes

04 Driver support
Cause Action Cause Action Cause Action

The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- The windscreen sur- Wait. It may take Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
face in front of the screen surface in face in front of the several minutes for between the inside have the windscreen
camera is dirty or front of the camera camera has been the camera to meas- of the windscreen inside the camera
covered with ice or from dirt, ice and cleaned but the ure the visibility. and the camera. cover cleaned - an
snow. snow. message remains. authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
Thick fog, heavy rain No action. At times mended.
or snow means that the camera does not
the camera does not work during heavy
04 work sufficiently rain or snowfall.
well.

Collis'n Collision warning system switched off.
warning Shown when the engine is started.
OFF
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision The collision warning system cannot be activated.

warn. Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
Unavaila-
ble The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto brak- Auto Brake has been active.

ing was The message clears after one press of the OK button.
activated

04 Driver support

Wind- The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
screen Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Sensors
blocked • Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Radar Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

blocked The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
See man- collected in front of the radar sensor. 04
ual
Collision Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

warn.
Service
required

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
General information on Driver Alert

System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
04 • Driver Alert Control – DAC, see page 179.

• Lane Departure Warning – LDW, see
page 182.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted
on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is instead only intended to be
of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility
that the car is driven safely.

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
General information on DAC The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete- Operation
riorating driving ability and it is primarily Some settings are made from the centre con-
intended for major roads. The function is not sole display screen and its menu system. For
intended for city traffic. information on how the menu system is used,
In some cases driving ability is not affected see page 200.
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may The current status of Driver Alert can be
not be any warning issued for the driver. For checked on the trip computer display with the
this reason it is always important to stop and thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch.
take a break in the event of any signs of driver
fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC
issues a warning. 04
NOTE
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is The function must not be used to extend a
intended to attract the driver's attention when driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if intervals and ensure that you are fully
he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall rested.
asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on Limitation
the carriageway and compares the section of In some cases the system may issue a warning
the road with the driver's steering wheel move- despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example: Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows
ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does
Driver
not follow the carriageway evenly. • if the driver tests the LDW function. Alert . On the second row the options
• in strong side winds. Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h, Driver
NOTE Alert
• on rutted road surfaces.
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 175. Unavailable or level mark can be
shown.
OK confirms or clears a warning in the
memory.

04 Driver support
On/Off The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars, WARNING
To set Driver Alert in standby mode: where a low number of bars indicates incon-
sistent driving style. Many bars indicates stable An alarm should be taken very seriously, as
• Search on the centre console's display driving. a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
screen with its MY CAR menu system and own condition.
locate Car settings Driver support If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-
systems Driver Alert and tick the box. driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
the text message Driver Alert Time for a as possible and rest.
• No tick in the box: Function disengaged. break. The warning is repeated after a time if Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
Function driving ability does not improve. gerous to drive while tired as it is under the
Driver Alert is activated when speed influence of alcohol.
04 exceeds 65 km/h and remains active
as long as the speed is over
60 km/h.

Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Standby <65 The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
km/h
Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.

The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent
driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
break
Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
04
Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged.
required

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
General information on - LDW Operation and function If the camera can no longer detect the carria-
geway's side markings the display shows
Lane Depart Warn Unavailable.
If speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the
function resumes standby mode and the dis-
play shows Lane Depart Warn Standby <65
km/h.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side
marking of the carriageway without due cause
then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
04
No warning is given in the following situations:
• Direction indicators activated
The LDW (Lane Departure Warning) function is The function is switched on or off by means of • The driver has his/her foot on the brake
intended to reduce the risk of so-called single- a switch on the centre console. An indicator pedal1
vehicle accidents – accidents where, in certain lamp in the button illuminates when the func-
situations, the vehicle leaves the carriageway tion is switched on.
• In the event of the accelerator pedal being
depressed rapidly1
and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart • In the event of rapid steering wheel move-
into oncoming traffic.
Warn Standby <65 km/h when the function is ments1
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side in standby mode due to speed being below 65
markings painted on the carriageway. The km/h. • In the event of a sudden turn so that the car
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the rolls.
The LDW function is activated automatically The camera sensor also has certain limitations.
vehicle crosses a side marking.
from standby mode after the camera has scan- For more information, see page 175.
ned in the carriageway's side markings and
speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer
display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 184.

04 Driver support
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.

04
Lane departure warning The function is switched on/off.
ON/Lane departure warn- Shown at switch-on/off.
ing OFF
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Standby The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
<65 km/h
Lane Depart Warn Unavail- The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
able Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 175.
Lane Depart Warn Availa- The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
ble

04 Driver support

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged.

required
04
Personal preferences started. Otherwise the same value as when

Settings are made from the centre console's the engine was switched off is obtained.
display screen via the menu system in MY • Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
CAR. From there, search and locate Settings increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and
Car settings Driver support systems fewer limitations apply.
Lane Departure Warning. For information
on how the menu system is used - see
page 200.
Select from the options:
• On at start-up - The function enters
standby mode every time the engine is

04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
General Function
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the
distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR - see page 200.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
04
• Rear only Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
• Both front and rear. front and right rear.
The system is automatically activated when the
The centre console's display screen shows an
engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is
NOTE overview of the relationship between the car
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
and detected obstacle.
When a towbar is configured with the car's off with the button, the lamp goes out.
electrical system, the protrusion of the tow- Marked sectors show which of the four sen-
bar is included when the function measures sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
the parking space. car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter
the distance between the car and a detected
WARNING obstacle.
• Parking assistance does not relinquish The frequency of the signal increases the
the driver's own responsibility during shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
parking. or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
• The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected. When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
• Be aware of e.g. people or animals near constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car. the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both

04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
behind and in front of the car, then the tone Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
IMPORTANT
Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossy
poles or low barriers may be in the "signal
shadow" and are then temporarily not
detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone
may then unexpectedly stop instead of
changing over to the expected constant
tone.
04 • In which case, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particu-
larly slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered in front of the car is about
damage to vehicles or other objects about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
since the sensors are unable to function obstacles behind comes from one of the rear front comes from one of the front loudspeak-
optimally. loudspeakers. ers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when Front parking assistance is active up to
reverse gear is engaged. 15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated
in order to indicate that the system is activated.
The system must be deactivated when revers-
When the speed is below 10 km/h the system
ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar
is reactivated.
or similar - otherwise they would trigger the
sensors.
NOTE
NOTE Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P mode
Rear parking assistance is deactivated is selected in a car with an automatic gear-
automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo box.
genuine trailer wiring is used.

04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
IMPORTANT Cleaning the sensors NOTE

When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
they must not obscure the sensors – the cause incorrect warning signals.
auxiliary lamps could then be detected as
obstacles.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates
with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows Park assist syst Service 04
G031402
required then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
Sensor location, front.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external audio
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, rear.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.

04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
General Function and operation When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
The parking camera is an assist system and is lines are shown graphically which illustrate
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
be changed in the settings menu, see current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
page 200). tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
The camera image is shown on the centre con- external dimensions are illustrated by means of
sole's screen. two dashed lines. These help lines can be
switched off in the settings menu.
NOTE If the car is also equipped with parking assis-
04 When a towbar is configured with the car's tance sensors* then their information is dis-
electrical system, the protrusion of the tow- played graphically as coloured fields in order to
bar is included when the function measures illustrate the distance to detected obstacles,
the parking space. CAM button location. see page 185.
The camera shows what is behind the car and The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
WARNING if something appears from the sides. reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
The camera shows a wide area behind the car car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
• The parking camera serves as an aid. It
does not relieve the driver of responsi- and part of the bumper and any towbar.
bility when reversing. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly
• The camera has blind spots, where - this is normal.
obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be aware of people and animals in the NOTE
vicinity of the car. Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active the parking camera

system takes over automatically and the cam-
era image is displayed on the screen. Camera location next to the opening handle.

04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Light conditions which shows the driver the path the car will Boundary lines
The camera image is adjusted automatically take, even when turning.
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in NOTE
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in a slightly reduced image quality. • When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the
lines on the display show the route the
NOTE car will take - not the trailer.
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and • The screen shows no lines when a trailer
ice to ensure optimum function. This is par- is connected electrically to the car's
ticularly important in poor light. electrical system. 04
• The parking camera is deactivated
Park assist lines automatically when towing a trailer if a The system's lines.
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards
from the car
IMPORTANT Boundary line, free reversing zone
Bear in mind that the screen only shows the
area behind the car - pay attention to the "Wheel tracks"
sides and front of the car when manoeuvring The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is
during reversing.
within about 30 cm from the bumper.
The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-
played for the driver. turning.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the side
were at ground level behind the car and are lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
directly related to steering wheel movement, extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.

04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Cars with reversing sensors* Colour / paint Distance Limitations

(metres)
NOTE
Yellow 1.5–
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
Orange 0.3–1.5 on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
Red 0–0.3
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
Settings only looks like a relatively small part of the
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is image is obscured, it could be a relatively large
04 shown. Make the settings as desired. sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles
could thereby go undetected until they are very
Miscellaneous close to the car.
Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show dis- • The default setting is that the camera is
tance. activated when reverse gear is engaged. To bear in mind
If the car is also equipped with parking assis- • One press on CAM activates the camera • Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
tance sensors (see page 185) the distance indi- even if reverse gear is not engaged. and snow.
cation will be more precise and the coloured • Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-
areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are reg-
• Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing warm water and car shampoo - take care
istering an obstacle. CAM. not to scratch the lens.
The colour of the areas changes with decreas- • If the car has more cameras* installed then
ing distance to the obstacle - from yellow to the camera in use is changed by turning
orange to red. TUNE.

04 Driver support
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
General information on BLIS WARNING If necessary, the system can be switched off
temporarily, see the section "Activate/deacti-
The system is a supplement to, not a vate".
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The Blind spots
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways. 04
G021426
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle
inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2)
Rearview mirror with BLIS function1.
illuminates with a constant glow.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp NOTE
BLIS symbol The lamp illuminates on the side of the car A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m.
where the system has detected the vehicle.
BLIS is an information system based on cam- If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
era technology that under certain conditions same time then both lamps illuminate.
can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in
the same direction as the host vehicle in the so- BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
called "blind spot". arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
on the information display. In such cases,
check and clean the lenses.

04 Driver support
Activate/deactivate When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but- Daylight and darkness
ton goes out and a message is shown in the In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
instrument panel display. the surrounding vehicles. The system is
When BLIS is activated the light in the button designed to detect motor vehicles such as
illuminates, a new text message is shown on cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
the display and the indicator lamps in the door In darkness the system reacts to the head-
panels flash 3 times. Press the OK button to lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-
delete the text message. (For a description of lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched
messages - see page 198). on then the system does not detect the vehi-
cles. This means for example that the system
04 When BLIS operates does not react to a trailer without headlamps
which is towed behind a car or truck.
The system operates when the car is driven at
Button for activating/deactivating. a speed above 10 km/h.
WARNING
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. Overtaking The system does not react to cyclists or
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash The system is designed to react if: moped riders.
three times when BLIS is activated.
• you overtake another vehicle at a speed of The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
The system can be deactivated/activated after up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle those of the human eye, i.e. they do not
starting the engine with one press on the "see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against
• you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up strong light or in thick fog.
BLIS button. to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre WARNING
console - in which case the function is handled BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
by the car's menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings BLIS. (For a BLIS does not work when the car is revers-
ing.
description of the menu system - see
page 200). A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-
vent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.

04 Driver support
Cleaning Message Specification Limitations

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be Blind spot syst. Reduced function in illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Reduced function the data transmis- within the blind spot.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not sion between the
scratched. BLIS system's cam- NOTE
era and the car's
electrical system. If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-
IMPORTANT lated occasions despite there being no
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice The camera resets other vehicle within the blind spot then this
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away itself when the data does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
from the lenses. transmission system. 04
between the BLIS In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
system's camera display shows the text Blind spot syst.
Messages on the display and the car's electri- Service required.
cal system returns to
Message Specification normal. The following illustrations show examples of
Blind-spot info The BLIS system is situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may
Blind-spot info The BLIS system is
system ON activated. illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within
system OFF deactivated.
the blind spot.
Blind spot syst. Blind spot syst. dis-
Service required engaged - contact a IMPORTANT
workshop.
Repair of the BLIS system components
Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is must only be performed by a workshop - an
Camera blocked blocked by dirt, authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
snow or ice - clean mended.
the lenses.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

04 Driver support
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g.

noise barrier or concrete road surface.
04
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.

04 Driver support
04
195
Menus and messages........................................................................... 198
Menu source MY CAR.......................................................................... 200
Climate control...................................................................................... 208
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* 218
Additional heater*.................................................................................. 221
Trip computer........................................................................................ 222
Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 224
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 225

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Combined instrument panel be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be Message

shown.
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
---- km to empty tank
--.- l/100km average
--.- l/100km instantaneous
--- km/h average speed
--- km/h current speed1
Information display and controls for menus. Engine oil level Wait...* Text message in the information display.
OK – access to message list and message When a warning, information or indicator sym-
05 Tyre pressure Calibration*
confirmation. bol illuminates, a corresponding message
Thumbwheel – browse between menu Park heat timer --:-- ---*2 appears on the information display. An error
options. Direct start Park heat ON*3 message is stored in a memory list until the
fault has been rectified.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in Additional heat auto ON*
certain cases to select/activate a function, Press OK to acknowledge and browse
see the explanation under each respective Lane Depart Warn * between the messages.
function. Driver Alert *
The menus shown on the information displays
in the combined instrument panel are con-
trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The
menus shown depend on key position, see
page 78. If a message appears then this must
1 Only certain markets.

2 Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off.
3 Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating.

Menus and messages
NOTE Message Specification Message Specification

If a warning message appears while you are Time for regular Time for regular service Transmission Drive more smoothly or
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press OK) before the previous maintenance - contact a workshopB. hot Reduce stop the car in a safe
activity can be resumed. The timing is deter- speed manner. Disengage the
mined by the number of gear and run the engine
kilometres driven, num- at idling speed until the
Message Specification ber of months since the message clearsC.
last service, engine run-
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the ning time and oil grade. Transmission Critical fault. Stop the
engine. Serious risk of hot Stop safely car immediately in a
damage - consult a Maintenance If the service intervals safe manner and con-
workshopB. overdue are not followed then tact a workshopB.
the warranty does not
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the cover any damaged Temporarily A function has been
engine. Serious risk of parts - contact a work- OFFA temporarily switched
05
damage - consult a shopB. off and is reset auto-
workshopB. matically while driving
Transmission Contact a workshopB to or after starting again.
Service urgentA Contact a workshopB to oil Change nee- check the car as soon
check the car immedi- ded as possible. Low battery The audio system is
ately. Power save switched off to save
Transmission The gearbox cannot mode energy. Charge the bat-
Service Contact a workshopB to performance handle full capacity. tery.
requiredA check the car as soon low Drive carefully until the A Part of message, shown together with information on where
as possible. message clearsC. the problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
See manualA Read the owner's man- If shown repeatedly - C For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 124.
ual. contact a workshopB.
Book time for Time to book regular
maintenance service - contact a
workshopB.
199
Menu source MY CAR
General information on MY CAR Operation • phone call is rejected

Many of the car's functions are handled
Centre console controls
• current function is interrupted
in this menu source, such as setting the • input characters are deleted
clock, door mirrors and locks.
• most recent selections are undone
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
• leads up in the menu system
buttons on the centre console or with the steer-
ing wheel's right-hand keypad. Short and long presses can also produce vary-
ing results.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on A long press leads to the highest menu level
the market. (Main source view), from where all of the car's
functions/menu sources can be accessed -
see also page 234.
05 Centre console controls for menu navigation.

Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the high-
lighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following occurs:
200
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel keypad* The following is an example of how a function MY CAR

can be accessed and adjusted using the steer- The following options are available in menu
ing wheel keypad: source MY CAR:
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the
thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
The keypad may vary depending on market. thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/ 5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the 05
down among the menu options. thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the functions opens. • My XC60
highlighted menu option or to store the • DRIVe*
6. Choose between the options All doors
selected function in the memory. • Support systems
and Driver door, then all and press the
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the • Settings
200). option's empty box.
Search paths 7. Exit the programming by backing out of the
Current menu level is shown at the top right of menus incrementally with short presses on
the centre console display screen. Search EXIT (2) or with one long press.
paths to the menu system functions are descri- The procedure is the same as with the centre
bed in this manual in the following form: console's buttons - see page 200: OK MENU
Settings Car settings Lock settings (2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
``

Menu source MY CAR
My XC60 Driver support system Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under
MY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur-
ther submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
• Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
MY CAR My XC60 MY CAR Support systems Car settings

05 The display screen shows a grouping of all of The display screen shows a summary of the
Car key memory p. 81
the car's driver support systems - these can be current status of the car's driver support sys-
and
activated or deactivated here. tems. On
103
Off
My DRIVe* Setup - menus
Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are described The menus are structured as follows:
here, amongst other things.
• Start/Stop Menu level 1
• Eco driving guide
Menu level 2 p. x
For more information - see page 126.
Menu level 3
Menu level 4

Menu source MY CAR
Lock settings p. 48, Light settings p. 46 p. 92

Triple indicator
55 and
Automatic door locking Door lock confirmation
57 On
light
On
Off
On
Off
Off p. 94
Doors unlock Temporary LH traffic
Unlock confirmation light
All doors On
On
Driver door, then Off
all Off
or
Keyless entry
p. 48 Temporary RH traffic
All doors Approach light duration
and 94
Off On
Any door
Off 05
Doors on same 30 sec
side 60 sec
p. 90
Both front doors Active bending lights
90 sec
On
Reduced Guard p. 60 p. 94
Home safe light duration Off
and 64
Activate once
30 sec
Ask when exiting p. 91
Auxiliary lights
60 sec
On
Side mirror settings p. 103 90 sec
Off
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror
Tilt right mirror
``
203
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel force p. 224 Lane Departure Warning p. 182 Distance Alert p. 162
Low On On
Medium Off Off
High On at start-up
Driver Alert p. 179
On
Reset car settings On
Off
All menus in Car settings are Off
given original factory settings. Increased sensitivity
On System options
Driver support systems
Off
Time p. 75
Collision Warning p. 170
DSTC p. 146 The instrument panel clock is set
On
05 here.
On
Off
Off Time format p. 75
Warning distance
12 h
Long City Safety p. 9
24 h
Normal and
On
165
Short Off
Warning sound
BLIS p. 191
On
On
Off
Off
204
Menu source MY CAR
Screen saver p. 200 Temperature unit Voice command list

On Celsius Phone commands
Off Fahrenheit Phone
The TV screen's current content Selects the unit for the display of Phone call con-
fades out after a period of inac- outside temperature and setting tact
tivity and is replaced by a blank of the climate control system.
Phone dial num-
screen if this option is selected.
Volume levels ber
The current screen content
Voice output volume Navigation commands
returns if any of the TV screen's
buttons or controls are actuated. Front park assist volume Navigation
Language Rear park assist volume Navigation

repeat instruc-
Selects language for menu texts. Phone ringing volume tion
05
Show help text Navigation go to
Reset system options
address
On All menus in System options are
General commands
Off given original factory settings.
Help
Explanatory text for the display Voice settings
screen's current content is shown Cancel
with this option selected. Voice tutorial Voice tutorial
Distance and fuel units p. 222 This menu option + OK provides The menu options under Phone
MPG (UK) spoken information about how commands show several exam-
the system works. ples of available voice commands
MPG (US) - only with a Bluetooth-enabled
km/l mobile phone installed. For more
l/100km
``
205
Menu source MY CAR
and detailed information - see Voice training Voice POI list

page 261.
User 1 Edit list
The menu options under Naviga-
tion commands show several User 2 The number of facilities is exten-
examples of available voice com- sive and varies depending on
With Voice training the voice
mands - only with Volvo's navi- market. Maximum 30 favourite
recognition system is taught to
gation system RTI* installed. facilities can be stored in this list.
recognise the driver's voice and
pronunciation. A number of phra- Menu option Voice POI list is
Voice user setting
ses are presented on the screen only shown if Volvo's navigation
Default setting for the driver to read aloud. When system RTI* is installed. For more
User 1 the system has learnt how the information on Facilities and
driver talks, the presentation of Voice recognition - see the Navi-
User 2 the phrases stops. Following gation system's owner's manual.
Here there is the option to create which e.g. User 1 can be
selected in Voice user setting in Audio settings p. 233
05 a second user profile - an advant-
age if more than one person shall order that the system shall listen
to the right user. Climate settings
use the car/system regularly.
Default setting gives factory set-
Voice output volume
tings.
A volume control appears on the
screen - at which point, proceed
as follows:
1. Adjust the volume with the
thumbwheel.
2. Test-listen using OK.
3. Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.

Menu source MY CAR
Automatic blower adjustment p. 208 Number of keys p. 46

Normal
VIN number p. 372
High
Low DivX® VOD code p. 254
Recirculation timer
Bluetooth software version in p. 260
On car
Off
Map and software version*
Automatic rear defroster
Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav-
On
igator - see separate manual.
Off
Interior air quality system 05
On
Off
Reset climate settings
All menus in Climate settings
are given original factory settings.
Favourites (FAV) p. 238
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information

Climate control
General Sensor location Temporary shut-off of the air

• The sun sensor is located on the top side conditioning
Climate control of the dashboard. When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full
The car is equipped with electronic climate acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the
control. The climate control system cools or
• The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate air conditioning can be temporarily switched
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas- control panel. off. There may then be a temporary increase in
senger compartment. temperature in the passenger compartment.
• The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
NOTE Condensation
• The humidity sensor* is located by the inte- In warm weather, condensation from the air
The air conditioning system (AC) can be rior rearview mirror.
switched off, but to ensure the best possible conditioning may drip under the car. This is
climate comfort in the passenger compart- normal.
ment and to prevent the windows from mist- NOTE
ing, it should always be on. Ice and snow
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects. Remove ice and snow from the climate control
05 system air intake (the grille between the bonnet
Actual temperature and the windscreen).
The temperature you select corresponds to the Side windows and panorama roof
physical experience with reference to factors To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- Total airing function
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation mally the side windows, and panorama roof if The function opens/closes all side windows
etc. in and around the car. appropriate, should be closed. simultaneously and can be used for example to
The system includes a sun sensor which quickly air the car during hot weather, see
Misting windows page 57.
detects on which side the sun is shining into
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
the passenger compartment. This means1 that Passenger compartment filter
by primarily using the defroster function.
the temperature can differ between the right All air entering the car's passenger compart-
and left-hand air vents despite the controls To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-
ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
being set for the same temperature on both dows clean and use window cleaner.
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
sides. Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
1 Only applies to ECC.

Climate control
severely contaminated environment, it may be NOTE • Fan speed in automatic mode*, see
necessary to replace the filter more often. page 214.
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP
the IAQS filter must be changed after • Recirculation timer for passenger com-
NOTE 15 000 km or once per year depending on partment air, see page 215.
There are different types of passenger com- whichever occurs first. However, up to • Automatic rear window defrosting, see
partment filter. Make sure that the correct 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP page 104.
filter is fitted. and where the customer does not want to
keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must • Air quality system IAQS*, see page 215
be changed at a regular service. The climate control system's functions can be
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* reset to the default settings via the menu sys-
This option keeps the passenger compartment tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Use of tested materials in the interior
clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- Settings Climate settings Reset
stances. For more information on CZIP, see the equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to climate settings.
brochure included with the purchase of the car.
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
The following is included: compartment and they contribute to making Air distribution
the passenger compartment easier to keep 05
• An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-
the remote control key. The fan fills the partment and the cargo area are removable
passenger compartment with fresh air. The and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
function starts when required and is dis- agents and car care products recommended
engaged automatically after a time or when by Volvo, see page 366.
one of the passenger compartment doors
is opened. The amount of time the fan runs Menu settings
is reduced gradually due to reduced need It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
up until the car is 4 years old. the default settings for four of the climate con-
trol system's functions via the centre console.
• The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto-
matic system that cleans the air in the pas- For general information about menu naviga-
senger compartment from contaminants tion, see page 201:
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous The incoming air is divided between a number
oxides and ground-level ozone. of different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.

Climate control
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Lateral airflow Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
mode*. ing in cold weather.
Vertical airflow
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see Aim the vents into the passenger compartment
page 217. Aim the outer vents at the side windows to to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear
remove misting. seat in hot weather.
Air vents in the dashboard
Air vents in the door pillars
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
05
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow

Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
05
Temperature control, left-hand side Air distribution - air vent instrument panel Temperature control, right-hand side
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand Air distribution - defroster windscreen Recirculation
side
Rear window and door mirror defrosters, AUTO
Max. defroster see page 104
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Fan Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
Air distribution - ventilation floor
``

Climate control
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
05
Fan Recirculation
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side side
AC – – Air conditioning on/off Temperature control
Max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 104
212
Climate control
Operating the controls Press the button three times for the lowest heat Press the button once for the highest heat level
level – one orange lamp illuminates in the TV – three lamps illuminate.
Heated seats* screen.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level –
Front seats Press the button four times to switch off the two lamps illuminate.
heat – no lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat
level – one lamp illuminates.
WARNING
Press the button four times to switch off the
The heated seat should not be used by peo- heat – no lamps illuminate.
ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera-
ture increase because of sensory loss or for Fan
any reason have difficulty in managing to
use the control of the heated seat. Other-
wise, burn injuries may arise. NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
Rear seat2 conditioning is not engaged - which can
05
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
TV screen.
Fan knob for ECC*
One press on the button gives Turn the knob to increase or
the highest heat level - three decrease fan speed. If AUTO
orange lamps illuminate in the is selected then fan speed is
centre console TV screen (see regulated automatically. The
figure above). previously set fan speed is
Press the button twice for a disengaged.
lower heat level – two orange lamps illuminate
in the TV screen.
2 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.

Climate control
Fan knob for ETC figure shows the air distribution that is when AUTO is pressed. The TV screen shows
Turn the knob to increase or selected. For more information on air distribu- AUTO CLIMATE.
decrease fan speed. tion, see page 217.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under: Settings
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High:
Air distribution
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
05 page 201.
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre
console TV screen.
Temperature control
AUTO1 The temperature can be
The Auto function automati- adjusted with the knob. For
cally regulates temperature, ECC* the temperature for the
air conditioning, fan speed, driver's side and the passen-
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
recirculation, and air distribu- ger side can be set sepa-
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel tion. rately.
Air distribution - ventilation floor When the car is started, the most recent setting
If you select one or more manual functions, the is resumed.
The figure consists of three buttons. When
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
matically. All manual settings are disengaged
is illuminated in the TV screen (see figure
below) and an arrow in front of each part of the
1 Only applies to ECC.

Climate control
NOTE The following also takes place in order to pro- IMPORTANT

vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by ger compartment: If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
selecting a higher/lower temperature than there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
the actual temperature required. • the air conditioning is automatically windows.
engaged
AC – Air conditioning on/off • recirculation and the air quality system are Timer
When the lamp in the AC but- automatically disengaged. With the timer function activated the system
ton illuminates, the air condi- will exit manually activated recirculation mode
tioning is controlled by the NOTE according to a time that depends on the out-
system's automatic function. The noise level increases as the fan is oper- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
This way, incoming air is ating at max. misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
cooled and dehumidified. function in the menu system MY CAR under
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off When the defroster is switched off the climate Settings Climate settings
the air conditioning is disconnected. Other control returns to the previous settings. Recirculation timer. For a description of the
functions are still controlled automatically. menu system, see page 201. 05
When the max. defroster function is activated Recirculation
the air conditioning is switched on automati- Recirculation NOTE
cally, so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi- When recirculation is When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
mum setting. engaged the orange lamp in tion is always deactivated.
the button illuminates. The
Max. defroster function is selected to shut
Used to quickly remove mist- Air quality system IAQS*
out bad air, exhaust gases
ing and ice from the wind- The air quality system separates gases and
etc. from the passenger com-
screen and side windows. Air particles to reduce the levels of odours and
partment. The air in the pas-
flowing to the windows. The pollution in the passenger compartment. If the
senger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no
light in the defroster button outside air is contaminated then the air intake
outside air is taken into the car when this func-
illuminates when the function is closed and the air is recirculated.
tion is activated.
is active. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Climate

Climate control
settings Interior air quality system. For a Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
description of the menu system, see With an auto-stopped engine certain equip-
page 201. ment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g.
climate control fan speed. For more informa-
NOTE tion, see page 126.
The air quality sensor should always be

engaged in order to obtain the best air in the
passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
If the insides of the windows start misting
up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen, the
side and the rear windows should also be
05 used to demist the windows.

Climate control
Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air to remove ice and misting Air to the floor and win- to ensure comfortable
flows from the air vents. quickly. dows. Some air flows conditions and good
The air is not recirculated. from the dashboard air demisting in cold or
Air conditioning is always vents. humid weather.
engaged.
Air to windscreen, via to prevent misting and Air to floor and from in sunny weather with
defroster vent, and side icing in a cold and humid dashboard air vents. cool outside tempera-
windows. Some air flows climate, (not at too low tures.
from the air vents. fan speed to enable this).
05
Airflow to windows and to ensure good comfort in Air to floor. Some air to direct heat or cold to
from dashboard air vents. warm, dry weather. flows to the dashboard the floor.
air vents and windows.
Airflow to the head and to ensure efficient cooling Airflow to windows, to provide cooler air
chest from the dashboard in warm weather. from dashboard air along the floor or warmer
air vents. vents and to the floor. air higher up in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.
217
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Fuel-driven heater Refuelling Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
General information about the parking level is too low, the parking heater will be
heater switched off automatically and a message
The parking heater heats the engine and pas- appears on the information display. Acknowl-
senger compartment and can be started edge the message by pressing the indicator
directly or with the timer. stalk OK button once, see page 219.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car IMPORTANT
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- Repeated use of the parking heater com-
tem calculates when heating should be started bined with short journeys may discharge the
based on the outside temperature. battery and impair starting.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- Warning label on fuel filler flap. The car should be driven for the same time
ture exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
maximum running time of the parking heater is battery is recharged adequately to replace
05 WARNING
50 minutes. the energy consumed by the heater when it
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch is used on a regular basis.
WARNING off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
The car must be outdoors when the parking
Check the information display to see that
heater is used.
the parking heater is switched off. When it
is running, the information display shows
NOTE Park heat ON.
When the parking heater is active there may

be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- Parking on a hill
ing, which is perfectly normal. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Operation NOTE Sym- Display Specification

bol
Heater The heater has
G025102
- Figure 2 in the symbol means the been stopped by
stopped
second climate control system in the car,
G025102
Batt. save the car's electron-
where the normal climate control system is
the first. The figure 2 has nothing to do with mode ics in order to facil-
TIMER 1 or TIMER 2. itate starting the
engine.
Sym- Display Specification Heater Setting the heater

bol unavail. is not possible due
G025102
Low fuel to fuel level being
Fuel The heater is level too low
OK button heater switched on and (approx. 7 litres) -
G025102
ON running. this is in order to 05
Thumbwheel
facilitate starting
RESET - resets/selects Timer is The heater's timer the engine as well
set for is activated after as approx. 50 km
For more information on the information dis-
G025102
Fuel the remote control driving.

play and OK, see page 198. heater key has been
removed from the Park Heater not work-
Symbols and display messages ignition switch and heater ing. Contact a
G025102
leaving the car - Service workshop for
When one of the timer's settings or
the engine and required repair. Volvo rec-
Direct start is activated, the infor-
passenger com- ommends that you
mation symbol in the combined instrument
partment are contact an author-
panel illuminates while the information display
heated at the set ised Volvo work-
shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-
time. shop.
nated symbol. The table shows symbols and
display texts that appear.

A display text clears automatically after a time Setting the timer Set the alternative time in the same way as
or after one press on the indicator stalk OK The time when the car shall be used and heated Park heat timer 1.
button. is specified with the timer.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. A timer-started heater can be switched off
Direct start and immediate stop manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start NOTE ceed as follows:
Park heat.
The timer can only be programmed when 1. Press OK.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and the remote control key is in key position I,
see page 78 - programming must therefore 2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
OFF.
be carried out before starting the engine. Park heat timer 1 or 2.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or > The text ON flashes on the display.
with programmed timer.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat 3. Press RESET.
OFF: Parking heater switched off. timer 1. > The text OFF is shown with a constant
Following the direct start of the heater it will be 2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- glow and the heater is switched OFF.
05
activated for 50 minutes. ing hours setting. A timer-started heater can be switched off in
Heating of the passenger compartment will 3. Select the required hour using the thumb- accordance with the instructions in the section
begin as soon as the engine coolant has wheel. "Direct start and immediate stop", see
reached the correct temperature. page 220.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting. Clock/timer
NOTE
5. Select the required minute using the The heater's time is connected to the car's
The car can be started and driven while the clock.
parking heater is running. thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
NOTE
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
All timer programming will be cleared if the
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start car's clock is reset.
time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Additional heater*
General information about the Passenger compartment heater*

additional heater If the additional heater is supplemented with
In cold climate zones1 an additional heater may timer function then it can be used as a fuel-
be required to obtain the correct operating driven passenger compartment heater, see
temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi- page 218.
cient heating in the passenger compartment.
Electric additional heater
Fuel-driven additional heater Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an elec-
A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars tric additional heater integrated into the car's
with diesel engines. climate control system.
The heater starts automatically when extra In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven cars
heat is required when the engine is running. OK button have an electric additional heater instead of a
fuel-driven version.
The heater is switched off automatically when Thumbwheel
the correct temperature is reached or when the The heater cannot be controlled manually but 05
engine is switched off. RESET button is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi-
NOTE tures below 14 °C and is switched off after the
tion I, see page 78.
set passenger compartment temperature has
When the additional heater is active there 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional been reached.
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel heat auto.
housing which is perfectly normal.
3. Press RESET to select between ON and
OFF.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start
sequence can be switched off if required. NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.

Trip computer
General Functions NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if
NOTE a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking
If a warning message appears when the trip heater* has been used.
computer is used then the message must
first be acknowledged before the trip com-
puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge the Km to empty tank
warning message by pressing OK. The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display
To change unit for distance and speed - go to shows the approximate distance that can be
MY CAR Settings System options driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the
Distance and fuel units, see page 200. tank.
Information display and controls. Average speed An economic driving style generally results in a
OK - confirms. Average speed is calculated from the last longer driving distance. For more information
05 on how fuel consumption can be influenced,
resetting. Reset using RESET.
Thumbwheel – browse between menus see page 11.
and options in the trip computer list. Instantaneous
No guaranteed range remains when the display
RESET – resets. Current fuel consumption is calculated every
shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as
second. The information on the display is
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. soon as possible.
updated every couple of seconds. When the
One of the menu options is a blank display - it car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
also marks the beginning/end of the loop. NOTE
Average There may be a slight error in the reading if
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the driving style has been changed.
the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Resetting
1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/
100km average.

Trip computer
2. Press and hold RESET for

approx. 1 second to reset the selected
function. If RESET is kept depressed for at
least 3 three seconds then Average speed
and Average are reset simultaneously.
Current speed*1
The instrument panel display changes to show
current speed in mph (miles per hour) if the
speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the
speedometer is graduated in mph then the dis-
play changes to km/h.
05
1 Only certain markets.

Adapting driving characteristics
Active chassis - Four-C* Operation Steering wheel force and select Low,
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled Medium or High.
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris-
For a description of the menu system, see
tics of the shock absorbers so that the car's
page 200. This menu cannot be accessed
driving characteristics can be adjusted. There
while the car is in motion.
are three settings: Comfort, Sport and
Advanced.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable on rough and uneven
road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the
movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Chassis settings.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived as Use the buttons in the centre console to
05
being more sporty and is recommended for change setting. The setting in use when the
more active driving. Steering response is faster engine is switched off is activated next time the
than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is engine is started.
harder and the body follows the road in order
to reduce rolling during cornering. Speed related power steering*
Advanced Steering force increases with the speed of the
This setting is only recommended on very even car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The
and smooth road surfaces. steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- extra effort when parking and at low speed.
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further
minimised. The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system
MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings

Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
05
``
225
Storage compartment in door panel Tunnel console out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Glovebox
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
Jacket holder
05
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing. Includes cup holder for driver and passen-
ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are The owner's manual and maps can be kept
WARNING specified then there is a cigarette lighter in here for example. There are also holders for
the 12 V socket for the front seat, see pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, page 227, and a detachable ashtray in the
cameras, remote controls for accessories, be locked using the key blade, see pages 50
cup holder.) and 57.
etc. in the glove compartment or other com-
partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal
ple in the car in the event of sudden braking objects in the cup holder as such objects could
or a collision. accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 63.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*

The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

Inlay mats* 12 V socket socket to supply current, the remote control

Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay key must be in at least key position I, see
mats. page 78.
WARNING WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat Always leave the plug in the socket when
in the driver area is firmly affixed and the socket is not in use.
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
G031435
Vanity mirror TV screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
12 V socket, front seat. passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote con- 05
trol key has been removed or when the car
is locked, for example, when the parking
heater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the
battery could be drained in the event of such
an occurrence!
G021440
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is 12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
switched on automatically when the cover is The electrical socket can be used for various
raised. accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the

IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel
console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90
W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
ets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
05 use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 325.
Electrical socket in cargo area*

For more information, see page 300.

05
229
General information on infotainment..................................................... 232
Radio..................................................................................................... 244
Media player......................................................................................... 251
External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................... 255
Media Bluetooth* ................................................................................ 258
Bluetooth handsfree*.......................................................................... 261
Voice recognition* mobile phone.......................................................... 270
TV*......................................................................................................... 274
Remote control* ................................................................................... 278
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system* .............................................. 280

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General NOTE Audyssey MultEQ1

The infotainment system consists of radio, Remove the remote control key from the
media player, TV* and the facility to communi- ignition switch if the infotainment system is
cate with mobile phone*. Information is pre- used when the engine is switched off. This
sented on a 5 or 7-inch* colour screen in the is to avoid discharging the battery unnec-
essarily.
upper section of the centre console. Functions
can be controlled via buttons in the steering
wheel, in the centre console under the colour Dolby, Pro Logic
screen or via a remote control*. A mobile phone
can also be controlled with voice recognition in
certain cases. The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
If the Infotainment System is active when the in the development and tuning of the sound to
engine is switched off then it is automatically ensure a world-class sound experience.
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door must
be closed on cars with Keyless systems*). Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
06 The infotainment system can be used for 15 Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
minutes at a time without the remote control trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
key being in the ignition switch by pressing the
On/Off button.
When the car is being started the infotainment
system is switched off temporarily and contin-
ues when the engine has started.
1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.

Overview Operating the system SOUND - press for access to audio settings
(bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see
page 239.
VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts the
system and long press (until the screen is off)
switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensus
system (including navigation * and phone func-
tions*) starts/switches off at the same time.
Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) or
restore the sound if it had been switched off.
Main sources - press to select the main
A/V-AUX input*
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without source is shown (e.g. FM1). If you are in
thumbwheel). MEDIA or TEL and press the main source but-
TV screen. The TV screen is available in ton then a shortcut menu is shown with com-
two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows monly used menu options.
a 7-inch TV screen. OK/MENU - Press to accept options in 06
Centre console control panel menus. Leads to menu view in selected source
(e.g. RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of
Rear control panel with headphones the screen is shown when there are underlying
socket* menus.
AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audio
TUNE - turn to scroll among disc tracks/
sources (e.g. iPod) Steering wheel keypad as alternative to controls in
the centre console. folders, radio and TV* stations, phone con-
tacts* or navigate through options on the TV
screen.
2 Only applies to Performance

3 Does not apply to Performance
``

EXIT - short press leads upwards in the Keypad with thumbwheel* OK/MENU/TUNE - Press to accept
menu system, interrupts current function, inter- options in menus. Leads to the menu view
rupts/rejects phone calls or erases entered in the selected source (e.g. RADIO or
characters. Long press leads to normal view, MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen is
or if you are in normal view to the highest menu shown when there are underlying menus.
level, see Main source view page 234. Turn to scroll among disc tracks/folders,
radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* or
INFO - If more information than can be navigate through options on the TV screen.
shown on the screen is available, press the
Without voice recognition5 - press to
INFO button to see the remaining information.
switch off the radio/media audio (MUTE) or
Preset buttons, input of numbers and let- restore the audio if it has been switched off.
ters. With voice recognition6 - Voice recogni-
tion (for Bluetooth-connected mobile
FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
Short presses scroll between disc tracks phone and navigation system*).
button can be programmed for a commonly or preset radio stations4. A long press
used function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor- Main source view
fast-winds disc tracks or searches for the A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel
mation, see page 238. next available radio station. keypad* leads to normal view. If you are in nor-
Volume - press to raise or lower the audio mal view and give a long press on EXIT then it
Steering wheel keypad volume. is possible to access the same main source
06 The steering wheel keypad can be used as an
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the buttons that are in the centre console:
alternative to the buttons in the centre console.
menu system, interrupts current function,
The keypad is available in three different ver- interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases NAV - Volvo's navigation system
sions depending on the options and the equip- entered characters. Long press leads to (RTI)*, is described in a separate
ment level of the car. normal view, or if you are in normal view to owner's manual.
the highest menu level, see Main source
view page 234. RADIO - AM, FM, DAB*
4 Does not apply to DAB.

5 Applies to cars without navigation.
6 Only cars with navigation.

MEDIA - CD, DVD, AUX, USB*, fast-winds disc tracks or searches for the
next available radio station.
Bluetooth*, TV*.
Volume - press to raise or lower the audio
TEL – Bluetooth handsfree* volume.
MY CAR - Car settings, see

page 200.
CAM - Park Assist Camera*, see

page 188
Keypad without thumbwheel
06
Short presses scroll between disc tracks

or preset radio stations7. A long press
7 Does not apply to DAB.

``

Menus
06
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut view, (4) Quick view, (5)
Menu view
236
Select main source by pressing a main source • Quick view (4) - fast mode when TUNE is
button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigate turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
in the source's menus, use the controls for station, etc.
TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT. • Menu view (5) - for menu navigation
Use TUNE to scroll in the menu, select the (accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
highlighted menu bar with OK/MENU or go The views have different appearances depend-
back with EXIT. In some cases it is possible to ing on the source, in-car equipment, settings,
access a shortcut menu by pressing the active etc.
source's main source button (1).
Pop-up menu8 video and TV*
For Menu overview, see page 240. Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order to
NOTE access the pop-up menu. VOLUME – Volume, left and right.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
Scroll/search forward and backward.
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be Rear control panel with headphones
used instead of the controls in the centre socket* MODE - Select between AM, FM1, FM2,
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), see
Headphones with an impedance of DAB1*, DAB2*, Disc, USB*, iPod*,
page 234.
16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher Bluetooth*, AUX, TV* and On/Off. For
are recommended for best sound reproduc- connection via USB* or AUX, see
Views in the TV screen tion. page 255 or via Bluetooth*, see 06
For each main source there are four basic page 259.
types of views:
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
• Normal view (2) - normal mode for the
source Activate/deactivate
• Shortcut menu (3) - shows commonly The control panel is activated with MODE.
used menu options in the main sources Deactivation is possible via a long press on
TEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing the MODE or when the engine is switched off.
active source's main source button (1)).
8 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.

Scroll/search forward and backward FAV - store a preset • Bluetooth*

Pressing (2) scrolls between disc tracks/audio • AUX
files or seeks the next available radio station.
• TV*
Limitations It is also possible to select and store a favourite
for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites can
NOTE also be selected and stored under MY CAR.
For more information on the menu system MY
The audio source (e.g. FM1, AM, Disc etc.) CAR, see page 200.
being played back through the speakers
cannot be controlled from the rear control To store a function in the FAV button:
panel.
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA).
NOTE 2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc,
In order that an audio source can be The FAV button can be used to store functions etc.).
selected with MODE and listened to it is that are used frequently so that the function
required that the audio source is available can be started simply by pressing FAV. You 3. Press and hold the FAV button until the
and connected in the car. can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each "favourites menu" is shown.
function as follows: 4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list
06 In RADIO mode: and press OK/MENU to save.
> When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
• AM MEDIA) is active the stored function is
• FM1/FM2 available via a short press on FAV.
• DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:
• DISC
• USB*
• iPod*

General audio settings • Subwoofer*9 - Bass speaker level. Sound stage9

Press SOUND to access the audio settings • DPL II centre level3 channel centre The sound experience can be optimised for the
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with level9 - Volume for centre speaker. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g. If there are passengers in both the front and
• DPL II surround level9, 10 – Level for sur- rear seats then the option recommended is;
Treble). round.
both front seats. The options can be selected
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
under Audio settings Sound stage.
the setting with OK/MENU. Advanced audio settings
For general information on menu navigation,
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options: Equalizer11 see page 236 and menu overview, see
The volume level can be adjusted separately page 240.
• Surround9 - Can be set to the On/Off posi- for different wavelengths.
tion. When On is selected, the system Audio volume and automatic volume
selects the setting for optimal sound repro- 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio control
duction. Normally DPLII and then settings and select Equalizer. The audio system compensates for disrupting
appear in the TV screen. If the recording is 2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and noises in the passenger compartment by
made with Dolby Digital technology then confirm with OK/MENU. increasing the volume in relation to the speed
playback will take place with this setting, of the car. The compensation level can be set
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
then appears in the TV screen.
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con-
When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is under Audio settings Volume
tinue in the same way with other wave- 06
available. compensation.
lengths you want to change.
• Bass - Bass level. For general information on menu navigation,
4. When you have finished with audio set-
• Treble - Treble level. tings, press EXIT to confirm and return to see page 236 and menu overview, see
• Fader – Balance between the front and normal view. page 240.
rear speakers.
For general information on menu navigation, External audio source audio volume
• Balance – Balance between the left and see page 236 and menu overview, see If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player
right-hand speakers. page 240. or iPod) is connected to the AUX input then
9 Only Premium Sound Multimedia.

10 Only when Surround is activated.
11 Not Performance.
``

the audio source that is connected can have a Optimum sound reproduction Menu overview
different volume than the audio system's inter- The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti-
nal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjust- mum sound reproduction by means of digital Menus RADIO
ing the volume of the input: signal processing.
Main menu AM
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to This calibration takes into account loudspeak- AM menu
AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/ ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
MENU. Show presets12
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to bination of car model and audio system. Scan
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/ There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes Audio settings13
MENU. into account the position of the volume control,
Sound stage14
radio reception and vehicle speed.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the
AUX input. The controls explained in these operating Equalizer15
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer, Volume compensation
NOTE are only intended for the user to be able to
Reset all audio settings
adapt the sound reproduction according to
If the external audio source's volume is too
personal taste.
high or too low, the quality of the sound may Main menu FM1/FM2
deteriorate. The audio quality may also be FM menu
impaired if the player is charged while the
06 infotainment system is in AUX mode. In TP
which case, avoid charging the player via
the 12 V socket. Show radio text
Show presets12
Scan
News settings
12 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

13 The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.
14 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
15 Does not apply to Performance.
240
Advanced settings Show PTY text Main menu DVD12 Video

REG Reset all DAB settings DVD Video Menu
Alternative frequency Audio settings16 DVD disc menu
EON Play/Pause/Continue
Menus MEDIA Stop
Set TP favourite
PTY settings Main menu CD Audio Subtitles
Disc menu
Reset all FM settings Audio tracks
Random
Audio settings16 Advanced settings
Scan
Angle
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2* Audio settings16 DivX® VOD code
DAB menu
Main menu CD/DVD12 Data Audio settings16
Ensemble learn
Disc menu
PTY filtering Main menu iPod15
Play/Pause iPod menu
Turn off PTY filtering
Stop Random
Show radio text 06
Random Scan
Show presets12
Repeat folder
Scan Audio settings16
Change subtitles
Advanced settings
Change audio track Main menu USB15
DAB linking USB menu
Scan
DAB band Play/Pause
Audio settings16
Sub channels
16 For submenus, see "Main menu AM".

``

Stop Main menu AUX Menus TEL

Random AUX menu
Main menu Bluetooth handsfree15
Repeat folder AUX input volume Phone menu
Select USB device Audio settings16 All calls
Change subtitles All calls
Main menu TV*
Change audio track TV menu Missed calls
Scan Select country Answered calls
Audio settings16 Reorganise presets Dialled calls
Autostore Call duration
Main menu Media Bluetooth15
Scan Phone book
Bluetooth menu
Random Audio settings16 Search
Change device New contact

Pop-up menu17 video and TV*
Remove Bluetooth device Speed dials
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
Scan played back or TV* is being shown in order to Receive vCard
06 access the pop-up menu.
Bluetooth software version in car Memory status
Image settings Clear phone book
Audio settings16
Source menu18 Change phone
DVD disc menu19 Remove Bluetooth device
DVD disc TOP menu19
16 For submenus, see "Main menu AM".

18 What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
19 Only applies to DVD video discs.

Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in
car
Call options
Auto answer
Voicemail number
Disconnect phone
06
243
Radio
General NOTE Automatic tuning

1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desired
wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, press
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of OK/MENU.
the buttons in the centre console. For a 2. Hold in / in the centre console (or
description of the steering wheel keypad,
see page 234. For a description of the in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio
remote control, see page 278. searches for the next/previous available
station.
Menus Station list1
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the The radio automatically compiles a list of the
centre console and the steering wheel key- strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga- rently receiving. This enables you to find a sta-
Centre console, controls for radio functions. tion, see page 236 and menu overview, see tion when you drive into an area where you do
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength page 240. not know the radio stations and their frequen-
(AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*). cies.
Station presets (0-9) Radio AM/FM To go to the list and select a station:
Select the desired frequency/station or 1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or

Tuning
06 navigate in the radio menu by turning FM2).
TUNE. NOTE 2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
Confirm your selection or go to the radio This displays the list of all stations in the
The reception is dependent both on how area. The currently tuned station is indi-
menu by pressing OK/MENU. good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by cated with enlarged text in the list.
Hold in the button for next/previous avail-
able station. Short press for preset. various factors such as tall buildings or the 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
transmitter being far away. Coverage level select a station from the list.
can also vary depending on where in the
country you are located. 4. Confirm your selection with OK/MENU.

Radio
NOTE in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec- NOTE
tion "Station list", page 244). When the station
• The list only shows the frequencies of list is shown, press the button in the cen- The preset from the factory is that the radio
stations that are currently being automatically searches for the stations in
tre console to change to manual tuning. This the area where you are driving (see previous
received, not a complete list of all radio
allows you to select a frequency from the list of section "Station list" above).
frequencies on the selected wave-
length. all available radio frequencies in the selected
But if you have changed over to manual tun-
wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one
• If the signal from the currently received ing (by pressing the button in the cen-
step in a manual search the frequency is
station is weak, this may prevent the tre console when the station list was
changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc. shown), then the radio remains set in the
radio from updating the station list. If
this occurs, press the button To manually select a station: function for manual tuning the next time you
switch on the radio. To change back to the
(while the station list is shown in the dis- 1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until function for "Station list", turn TUNE one
play screen) in order to change to man- the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is step (to show the complete list of stations)
ual tuning and set a frequency. If the shown, press OK/MENU. and press the button .
station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction to 2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency. Note that if you press when the sta-
show the list again, and press to tion list is not shown then INFO is activated.
switch. For more information on this function, see
page 233.
The list disappears from the TV screen after a 06

few seconds.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM,
If the station list is no longer shown, turn FM1 etc.).
TUNE one step in either direction and press the
The stored presets are selected using the pre-
button in the centre console to change
set buttons.
to manual tuning (or to return from manual tun-
ing to the function for "Station list"). 1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page
244).
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio 2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few
shows the station list of the strongest stations seconds, the sound disappears during this
245
Radio
time and returns when the station is stored. player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting send traffic information then this is shown by
The preset button can now be used. transmission is played at a preset volume, see TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise
page 248. The radio returns to the previous TP will be grey.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
audio source and volume when the set pro-
in the TV screen. The function is activated/ – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
gramme type is no longer broadcast.
deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu menu TP.
Show presets or AM menu Show The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
presets. traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro- Enhanced Other Networks – EON
gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in This function is useful in urban areas with many
RDS functions order of priority, where alarm has the highest regional radio stations. It allows the distance
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters priority and programme types has the lowest. between the car and the radio station trans-
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a For additional settings of programming inter- mitter to determine when programme functions
network sends information that gives an RDS ruptions (EON Distant and EON Local), see should interrupt the current audio source.
radio the following functions: the section "Enhanced Other Networks – – Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-
EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the inter-
• Automatically switches to a stronger trans- ing one of the options under FM menu
mitter if reception in the area is poor. rupted audio source, press the OK/MENU to
clear the message. Advanced settings EON:
• Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news. Alarm
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
• Receives text information on current radio This function is used to warn of serious acci-
06 programme. dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be • Distant3 – interrupts if the station trans-
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
message ALARM! appears on the TV screen static.
NOTE
when an alarm message is transmitted. TP from selected station/all stations
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality. Traffic information – TP The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa-
This function allows traffic information sent tion from the selected station or all stations
If a required programme type is located the within a set station's RDS network to break within the RDS network.
radio can switch stations interrupting the audio through. The TP symbol indicates that the – Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced
source currently in use. For example, if the CD function is activated. If the preset station can settings Set TP favourite to change.

3 Factory settings.
246
Radio
News 2. Then the PTY function must be activated – To continue searching for another broad-
This function allows news broadcasts sent under FM menu Advanced settings cast of the selected programme types,
within a set station's RDS network to break PTY settings Receive traffic press on or .
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the bulletins from other networks.
function is active. Display of programme type
An indicator is shown in the TV screen when The programme type of the current station can
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM PTY is activated. be shown on the TV screen.
menu News settings News.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
News from selected station/all stations in FM mode under FM menu Advanced menu Advanced settings PTY
The radio can only interrupt for news from the settings PTY settings Receive traffic settings Show PTY text.
selected station or all stations in the RDS net- bulletins from other networks. Selected pro-
work. gramme types (PTY) are not reset. Radio text4
– Some RDS stations transmit information on
Go in FM mode to FM menu News Resetting and removing PTY are performed
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
settings Set news favourite to change. under FM menu Advanced settings tion can be shown on the TV screen.
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
Programme types – PTY – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
The PTY function can be used to select one or PTY search menu Show radio text.
more programme types, such as pop music This function searches the entire wavelength
and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates for the selected programme type. Automatic frequency update – AF 06
that the function is active. This function allows The function selects the strongest transmitter
programme types broadcast within a set sta- 1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under for the set station. In order to find a strong
tion's RDS network to break through. FM menu Advanced settings PTY transmitter the function may, in exceptional
settings Select PTY. cases, need to search the entire FM wave-
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
length.
programme types under FM menu 2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings
Advanced settings PTY settings PTY settings Seek PTY. – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
Select PTY. menu Advanced settings
To finish searching, press EXIT. Alternative frequency.
4 Only cars with 7-inch screen

``
247
Radio
Regional radio programmes – REG – To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to Programming of channel groups creates an
This function causes the radio to continue with FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan. updated list of all available channel groups.
a regional transmitter even if its signal strength The list is not updated automatically.
is low. The symbol REG shows that the func- NOTE Programming is carried out in the menu system
tion is active.
Scanning stops if a station is saved. in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM learn. Programming can also take place as fol-
menu Advanced settings REG. lows:
Radio system - DAB* 1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original General > Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
factory settings. DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital available channel groups.
broadcasting system for radio. This system
– The reset is carried out in FM mode under 2. Press OK/MENU.
supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
FM menu Advanced settings > New programming is started.
Reset all FM settings. NOTE Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
Volume control, programme types Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca- Navigation in channel group list
The interrupting programme types, e.g. tions. If there is no coverage then the mes-
(Ensemble)
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected sage No reception is shown in the display
screen. To navigate in and access the channel group
for each respective programme type. If the vol- list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
06
ume level is adjusted during the programme shown in the upper part of the TV screen. When
interruption, the new level is saved until the Service and Ensemble switching to the new Ensemble the name
next programme interruption. • Service - Channel, radio channel (only changes to the new one.
audio services are supported by the sys-
Scan wavelength tem). • Service - Shows channels irrespective of
The function automatically searches for avail- the channel group to which they are allo-
able channels and takes into account any pro- • Ensemble - A collection of radio channels cated. The list can also be filtered using the
on the same frequency.
gramme type filtering. When a station is found, selection of programme type (PTY
it is played for approx. 10 seconds before Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) filtering), see below.
scanning is resumed. When a station is playing When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-
back it can be saved as a preset in the usual casting area, programming of existing channel
way, see the section Preset, page 245. groups in the area may be necessary.

Radio
Scanning Programme type is selected in DAB mode A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5
The function automatically searches the cur- under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this in the TV screen. The function is activated/
rent wavelength for strong stations. When a mode as follows: deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
station is found, it is played for approx. 10 sec- Show presets.
– Press EXIT.
onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta-
tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the > An indicator is shown in the TV screen
when PTY is activated.
NOTE
usual way. For more information on presets,
see "Preset" below. The audio system's DAB system does not
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
support all functions available in the DAB
– Go in DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is imple- standard.
mented.
start scanning.
Preset Radio text
NOTE 10 station presets can be stored per wave- Some radio stations transmit information on
Scanning stops if a station is saved. length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made tion is shown on the TV screen.
by means of a long press on the desired preset The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
button, for more information see page 245. The
mode. In which case only channels of the pre- mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
stored presets are selected using the preset
selected programme type are played.
buttons.
NOTE
Programme type (PTY) A preset contains one channel but no sub- 06
Various types of radio programmes can be channels. If a subchannel is being played and Only one of the functions "Show radio
selected using the programme type function. a preset is saved then only the main channel is text" and "Show presets" can be acti-
There are a number of different programme vated at a time. If one of them is activated
registered. This is because subchannels are
types which also include different programme when the other is already activated, then the
temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the previously activated function is deactivated
categories. After selecting a programme type, preset, the channel which contained the sub- automatically. Both functions can be deac-
navigation only takes place within the channels channel will be played. The preset is not tivated.
that are broadcasting that type. dependent on the channel list.
249
Radio
Advanced settings Subchannel Resetting the DAB settings

DAB to DAB link Secondary components are usually named All DAB settings can be reset to the original
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio subchannels. These are temporary and can factory settings.
contain e.g. translations of the main pro-
can go from one channel with poor or no recep- – The reset is carried out in DAB mode under
tion to the same channel in another channel gramme into other languages.
DAB menu Advanced settings
group with better reception. There may be a If one or more subchannels are broadcast then Reset all DAB settings.
certain delay when changing channel group. the symbol is shown to the left of the chan-
There may be a period of silence between the nel name in the TV screen. A subchannel is
current channel no longer being available to the indicated by the - symbol appearing to the left
new channel becoming available. of the channel name in the TV screen.
The function can be activated/deactivated in Press to access the subchannels.
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking. Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
Wavelength channel without selecting it.
DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
• Band III - covers most areas. activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
• LBand - available only in a few areas. Advanced settings Sub channels
06 By selecting for example Band III on its own, Programme type text
channel programming takes place more Some radio stations broadcast information
quickly than if both Band III and LBand have about programme type and programme cate-
been selected. It is not certain that all channel gory, for information on Programme types –
groups will be found. Wavelength selection PTY, see page 247. This information is shown
does not affect the stored memories. on the TV screen.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band. settings Show PTY text.
6 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
250
Media player
CD/DVD1 functions Confirm your selection or go to the menu Menus

for the selected media source by pressing The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the
OK/MENU. centre console and the steering wheel key-
Fast forward/reverse and change disc pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
track or chapter2. tion, see page 236 and menu overview, see
page 240.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files: Starting playback of a disc
• Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio). Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until
Disc is shown, press OK/MENU. If there is a
• Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files1. disc in the media player then the disc starts
playing back automatically, otherwise Insert
• Pre-recorded DVD video discs1. disc is shown in the TV screen. Then insert a
Centre console control panel.
• Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or video disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play
files. back automatically.
Disc insert and eject slot
For more information about the supported for- If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
MEDIA button, activates last active media mats, see page 254. the player then the disc's folder structure
source. If you are already in a media source needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
and press the MEDIA button then a short- NOTE of the disc and the quantity of information there
cut menu is shown for commonly used may be a certain delay before playback starts. 06
menu options. keypad* and/or remote control* then in
Disc eject many cases these can be used instead of Disc eject
the buttons in the centre console. For a A disc remains in the ejected position for
Input of numbers and letters. description of the steering wheel keypad, about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
see page 234. For a description of the back into the player for safety reasons.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate remote control, see page 278.
through menu options by turning TUNE. Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed

2 Only applies to DVD discs.

Media player
again, the media player starts. It is also possi- Audio/video files can also be changed by NOTE
ble to pause via the menu system3, press OK/ pressing / on the centre console or the
MENU, select Play/Pause. A video film is only shown when the car is
steering wheel keypad*. stationary. When the car is moving at a
Playback and navigation Audio files have the symbol , video files1 speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
CD audio discs have the symbol and folders have the while driving appears on the display
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and symbol . screen, although the audio is heard during
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm this time. The picture is shown again as
When playback of a file is complete the play- soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
the selection of the disc track and start play-
back of the other files (of the same type) in that km/h.
back. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist.
particular folder continues. Change4 of folder
A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root
takes place automatically when all the files in
level. NOTE
the current folder have been played back. The
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing system automatically detects and changes Some audio files that are copy-protected by
on / on the centre console or the setting when a disc containing only audio files record companies or privately copied audio
steering wheel keypad*. or only video files is loaded into the media files cannot be loaded by the player.
player and then plays back these files. How-
Burned discs audio/video files1 ever, the system does not change setting if a
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder DVD video discs1
disc containing a mixture of audio and video For playback of DVD video discs, see
structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use files is loaded into the media player, but instead
06 OK/MENU to confirm either selection of sub- page 253.
the player continues to play back the previous
folder or start of playback of the selected file type. Fast forward/reverse
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder Hold in the buttons / to fast forward/
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound
playlist's root level. at one speed, while video files are fast forwar-
ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly
press the buttons / to increase the fast
3 Does not apply to CD Audio

4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.

Media player
forward/rewind speed for video files. Release Repeat folder6 NOTE

the button to return to viewing at normal speed. This function makes it possible to play files in
A video film is only shown when the car is
a folder over and over again. When the last file
Scan5 stationary. When the car is moving at a
has been played out, playback of the first file speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
This function plays the first ten seconds of starts again. shown and No visual media available
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
1. Press OK/MENU while driving appears on the display
1. Press OK/MENU screen, although the audio is heard during
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder this time. The picture is shown again as
2. Turn TUNE to Scan soon as the car's speed falls below about 6
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate km/h.
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
the function.
or audio file are played.
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track Playback of DVD video discs1 Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu
or audio file being played back will con- Playback
tinue playing. When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
menu may appear on the display screen. The
Random5
disc menu gives access to additional functions
This function plays the tracks in random order.
and settings, such as selecting subtitles, lan-
To listen to the tracks in random order:
guage and scene selection.
1. Press OK/MENU
06
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by
pressing / on the centre console or the Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
steering wheel keypad*. performed using the number keys in the centre
console as illustrated above.
5 Does not apply to DVD video discs.

6 Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.

Media player
Changing chapter or title DivX Video On Demand Compatible file formats

Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and The media player can be registered in order to The media player can play back a variety of file
navigate through them (if the film is being play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or types and is compatible with the formats in the
played back then it is paused). Press OK/ USB. The code for registration can be found in following table.
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads the menu system MY CAR Settings
back to the original position (if the film was Information DivX® VOD code. For general NOTE
being played back then it is restarted). Press
information on menus, see under MY CAR, see Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus,
EXIT to access the title list.
page 200. CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD
Titles are selected in the title list by turning discs and therefore playback cannot be
For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/ guaranteed and malfunction may arise.
MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list. Picture settings7 If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA
Press OK/MENU to activate the selection and You can adjust the settings (when the car is tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel stationary) for brightness and contrast.
the selection and this leads back to the original
position (without any selection being made). 1. Press OK/MENU and select Image Audio formatA CD audio, mp3,
settings, confirm with OK/MENU. wma
The chapter can also be changed by pressing
on / on the centre console or the 2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and Audio formatB CD audio, mp3,
confirm with OK/MENU. wma, aac, m4a
steering wheel keypad*.
06 3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
Advanced settings7 Video formatC CD video,
confirm with OK/MENU.
DVD video, divx, avi,
Angle To return to the settings list, press the OK/ asf
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function MENU or EXIT.
A Applies to Performance.
can be used to choose from which camera
The picture settings can be reset to factory B Does not apply to Performance.
position a particular scene should be shown. C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings with the Reset option. Sound Multimedia.
settings Angle.
7 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

External audio source via AUX/USB* input
General NOTE structure and number of files there may be

some delay before loading is finished.
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of NOTE
the buttons in the centre console. For a The system supports most iPod models
description of the steering wheel keypad, produced in 2005 or later.
see page 234. For a description of the
remote control, see page 278.
NOTE
An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable bat- To prevent damage to the USB connection,
teries is recharged (when the ignition is on or this is shut off if the USB connection is
the engine is running) if the device is plugged short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is
into the USB connection. taking too much power (this may happen if
Connection points for external audio sources. the unit connected does not meet the USB
To connect the audio source: standard). The USB connection is reactiva-
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 ted automatically the next time the ignition
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the desired
player, can be connected to the audio system is turned on, unless the fault persists.
audio source USB, iPod or AUX, press
via any of the connections in the centre con-
OK/MENU.
sole. An audio source connected to the USB Menus
input can then be handled1 with the car's audio > If USB is selected then Connect USB is
shown in the TV screen. The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the 06
controls. A device connected via the AUX input centre console and the steering wheel key-
cannot be controlled via the car. 2. Connect your audio source to one of the pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
connections in the centre console's stor- tion, see page 236 and menu overview, see
age compartment (see previous illustra- page 240.
tion).
The text Reading USB is shown in the TV
screen when the system is loading the storage
media's file structure. Depending on the file
1 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.

Playback and navigation2 device containing a mixture of audio and video Repeat folder5
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder struc- files is connected to the USB port, but instead See page 253.
ture and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/ the player continues to play back the previous
MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder file type. Pause
or start of playback of the selected audio/video When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
Fast forward/reverse2 is pressed, the media player is paused. When
file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play-
See page 252. the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
list or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long
again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level. Scan2 ble to pause via the menu system6, press OK/
Audio/video files can also be changed by See page 253. MENU, select Play/Pause.
pressing / on the centre console or the
Random2
steering wheel keypad*.
See page 253. Audio sources
Audio files have the symbol , video files3
Search function2 USB memory
have the symbol and folders have the
The keypad on the control panel in the centre To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
symbol . console can be used to find a filename in the only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer
When playback of a file is complete the play- current folder. for the system to load storage media that con-
back of the other files (of the same type) in that tains anything other than compatible music
The search function is accessed either by turn- files.
particular folder continues. Change4 of folder ing TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by
06 takes place automatically when all the files in pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or
the current folder have been played back. The character in a search string is entered you get
system automatically detects and changes closer to your search target.
setting when a device containing only audio
files or only video files is connected to the USB Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
port and then it plays back these files. How- MENU.
ever, the system does not change setting if a
2 Only applies to USB and iPod.

3 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
5 Only applies to USB.
6 Does not apply to iPod

NOTE iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power
The system supports mobile media compli-
ant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system by the USB connection* via the player's con-
and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi- nection cable.
mum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder.
The top level, which can handle up to 1000 NOTE
subfolders/files, is an exception to this.
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPod.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory NOTE
stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec-
ommended. This is to avoid mechanical When an iPod is used as audio source, the
wear to the USB input and the connected car's infotainment system has a menu
USB memory stick. structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
USB hub
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB Compatible file formats via the USB
connection and thereby connect multiple USB
connection
devices simultaneously. Selection of USB 06
Audio and video files in the following table are
device is made in USB mode under USB menu
supported by the system for playback via the
Select USB device.
USB connection.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems Audio format mp3, wma, aac,
that are not supported by the audio system. For m4a
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
Video formatA divx, avi, asf
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode. A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.

Media Bluetooth*
General NOTE source is activated and you press MEDIA

The car's media player is equipped with then a shortcut menu is shown with com-
The car's media player can only play the monly used menu options.
Bluetooth1 and can wirelessly play streaming audio files via the Bluetooth function.
audio files from external devices with Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
Bluetooth, such as mobile phones and PDAs.
Menus Confirm your selection or go to the menu
Navigation and control of the sound can be
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the by pressing OK/MENU.
carried out via the centre console buttons or via
the steering wheel keypad*. In some external centre console and the steering wheel key- EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
devices it is also possible to change tracks pad*. For general information on menu naviga- the function in progress.
from the device. tion, see page 236 and menu overview, see
Short presses are used to scroll between
page 240.
To play back the audio the car's media player audio files. Long presses are used to fast
must first be set in Bluetooth mode. forward and rewind audio files.
Overview
NOTE NOTE
The Bluetooth media player must support If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile keypad* and/or remote control* then in
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution many cases these can be used instead of
Profile (A2DP). The player should use the buttons in the centre console. For a
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise description of the steering wheel keypad,
06 see page 234. For a description of the
some functions may not work.
remote control, see page 278.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully com-
patible with the Bluetooth function in the
car's media player. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on Centre console control panel.
compatible phones and external media VOL – volume
players.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod) is activated automatically. If a
1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

Media Bluetooth*
Getting started 2. Check that the external device is searcha- 3. Select the device to be removed by turning
ble/visible via Bluetooth, see the manual TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
Connect an external Bluetooth device for the external device. > A prompt asking whether or not you
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg- want to remove the connection is shown
istered. The connection is made in the same 3. Press OK/MENU.
in the TV screen.
way as for the phone, see Connect an external 4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and con-
Bluetooth® device, page 262. firm with OK/MENU. 4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
> After a while, the external device's name EXIT cancels.
Automatic connection
is shown in the TV screen. If several
When the Bluetooth function is active and the
external devices have been paired then Random2
last external device connected is in range it is
these are also shown.
connected automatically. When the infotain- This function plays back the audio files on the
ment system searches for the last device con- 5. Select the device to be connected by turn- external device in random order. Activate/
nected its name is shown in the TV screen. To ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
connect to another device, press EXIT. Con- > Connection of the external device takes mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
nect a new external device, see "Change to place.
another external device" below. Change audio file by pressing / on the
Change audio file by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Change to another external device centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices Disconnecting the device Scanning of audio files in external 06
in the car. However, the device must first have Automatic disconnection takes place if the device2
been paired, see "Connect an external Blue- external device moves out of the infotainment This function play backs the first ten seconds
tooth® device" above. To change to another system's range. For more information on con- of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the func-
device: nection, see page 259. tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu
Scan.
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth Remove the connected device
is shown, press OK/MENU. 1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU. Cancel scanning with EXIT.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

``

Media Bluetooth*
Version information Bluetooth

The car's current Bluetooth version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
06

Bluetooth handsfree*
General Overview Phone functions, controls overview

A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can
be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment
system1. The infotainment system then works
handsfree, with the option to control a range of
the mobile phone's functions remotely. The
microphone used is located by the driver's sun
visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by
its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is
connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully System overview Centre console control panel.
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis- Mobile phone Number and letter buttons
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on Microphone TEL button activates/searches last con-
compatible phones. nected phone. If a phone is already con-
Steering wheel keypad nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut
Centre console control panel menu is shown with commonly used menu 06
Menus options for the phone.
The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen-
tre console and the steering wheel keypad*. TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
For general information on menu navigation, access the phone book, and to the left for
see page 236 and menu overview, see the call register for all calls; also used for
page 240. navigation among the options on the TV
screen.
1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

Accept incoming calls, confirm your selec- It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices phone if another phone is already con-
tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing connected simultaneously. One phone and nected.
OK/MENU. one media device, which it is possible to switch If one or more devices have already been
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes between, see page 263 or see page 259. It is connected then these are also shown.
input characters, leads up in the menu sys- also possible to use the phone while streaming Select the device you want to connect and
tem and cancels the current function. audio files from a connected device. press OK/MENU.
Connecting an external device takes place in > The menu option is shown on the TV
NOTE different ways depending on whether or not the screen.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel device has been connected previously.
4. Check that the external device's
keypad* and/or remote control* then in To connect a device for the first time, follow the Bluetooth function is switched on and
many cases these can be used instead of connection alternatives below.
the buttons in the centre console. For a press OK/MENU.
description of the steering wheel keypad, There are two possible ways of connecting > The car searches for external devices in
see page 234. For a description of the devices, either search for the external device the vicinity. The search takes approxi-
remote control, see page 278. from the car, or search for the car from the mately 30 seconds. The external devi-
external device. If one option does not work ces detected are specified with their
then try with the other. respective Bluetooth name in the TV
Remember screen. The handsfree function's
Alternative 1 - search for the external device
Activate via the car's menu system Bluetooth name is shown in the exter-
06 A short press on TEL activates/searches last nal device as My Volvo Car.
1. Make the external device searchable/visi-
connected phone. If a phone is already con- 5. Turn TUNE to select one of the external
ble via Bluetooth, see the external devi-
nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu devices shown on the car's TV screen and
ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.
is shown with commonly used menu options confirm with OK/MENU.
for the phone. The symbol indicates that 2. Press TEL.
6. Enter the series of numbers (PIN code) that
a phone is connected. > The car searches for previously con-
is shown on the car's TV screen via the
nected devices.
Connect an external Bluetooth device mobile phone's keypad and press the
3. Activate Bluetooth in the car. Press OK/ mobile phone's button to confirm the
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per MENU, select Add phone or Change selection.
device. After registration the device no longer The external device is now connected to the
needs to be activated as visible/searchable. car and can be controlled from the car.

If connecting the phone is not successful: When the connection is established, the exter- 2. Press TEL and then select Change
Press EXIT and connect in accordance with nal device's Bluetooth name is shown in the phone.
Alternative 2. car's TV screen. Now the external device can > The car searches for previously con-
If connecting the media device is not success- be controlled from the car. nected devices. The external devices
ful: Connect in accordance with Alternative 2. Automatic connection detected are specified with their respec-
When the handsfree function is active and the tive Bluetooth name in the TV screen.
Alternative 2 - search for the car via the exter-
nal device last mobile phone connected is in range it is 3. Select the device to be connected by turn-
connected automatically. If the last connected ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
1. Press TEL. mobile phone is not available then the system > Connection of the external device takes
If an external device is already connected, will try to connect a mobile phone that was place.
disconnect it. paired earlier. When the audio system
> The car searches for previously con- searches for the last phone connected its name To call
nected devices. is shown in the TV screen. 1. Make sure that the symbol appears
Manual connection at the top of the TV screen and that the
2. Make the car searchable/visible via
If you want to change the connected mobile handsfree function is in phone mode.
Bluetooth. Press OK/MENU, select
phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu 2. Dial either the desired number or speed
Phone settings Discoverable.
Change phone. dial number, see page 268. Or in normal
3. Search for the car with the external devi- view turn TUNE to the right to access the
ce's Bluetooth function, see the manual Change to another external device phone book, and to the left for the call reg- 06
for the external device. It is possible to change a connected device ister for all calls. For information on the
4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices with another device if there are several devices phone book, see page 265.
detected in your external device. in the car. However, the device must first have
3. Press OK/MENU.
been registered to the car, see Connect an
5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the external Bluetooth® device. To change to The call is interrupted with EXIT.
external device via the external device's another device:
keypad when prompted for a PIN. Then Disconnecting the mobile phone
enter the same PIN code via the car's key- 1. Check that the external device is searcha- Automatic disconnection takes place if the
pad. ble/visible via Bluetooth, see the manual mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
for the external device. range. The connection to the mobile phone can
6. Choose to connect to My Volvo Car from
be manually broken in phone mode under
the external device.
``

Phone menu Disconnect phone. For more Making and receiving calls Call lists
information on connection, see page 262. The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
Incoming call tion at each new connection and are then
The handsfree function is deactivated when – Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even updated during the connection. In normal view,
the engine is switched off and the door is if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register
opened2. MEDIA mode. for All calls .
When the mobile phone has been discon- Refuse or end with EXIT. In phone mode it is possible to see all the call
nected an ongoing call can be continued by
Automatic answer lists under Phone menu All calls:
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker. The automatic answer function means that • All calls
calls are accepted automatically.
• Missed calls
NOTE – Activate/deactivate in phone mode under • Answered calls
Even when your mobile phone has been Phone menu Call options Auto
manually disconnected, some mobile
• Dialled calls
answer.
phones may automatically couple up to the • Call duration
last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a In call menu
new call begins. Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to NOTE
access the following functions:
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
Remove the device • Mute - audio system microphone is dialled numbers in reverse order.
06 A connected mobile phone can be deregis- muted.
tered and removed. This is performed in phone
• Mobile phone - the call is transferred from Voice mailbox
mode under Phone menu Remove handsfree to the mobile phone. For some In normal view a speed dial number for the
Bluetooth device. mobile phones the connection is interrup- voice mailbox can be programmed in and then
ted. This is normal. The handsfree function accessed later via a long press on 1.
asks if you want to reconnect.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
• Dial number - option to call a third party mode under Phone menu Call options
using the number keys (current call set in
standby). Voicemail number Change number. If
2 Only Keyless Drive.

there is no number stored then this menu can Ring signals this phone book was downloaded is con-
be reached with one long press on 1. The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nected.
nals that can be selected in phone mode under • The car also has a built-in phone book. This
Audio settings Phone menu Phone settings Sounds contains all the contacts stored in the car
and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1 irrespective of which phone was con-
Phone call volume etc. nected when saving them. These contacts
The phone call volume can only be changed are visible for all users, regardless of the
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad* mobile phone that is connected to the car.
NOTE If a contact is saved in the car then the
or turn the VOL control.
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on symbol is shown in front of the con-
Audio system volume the phone connected will not be switched tact in the phone book.
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
the audio system volume is controlled as usual handsfree system is used.
NOTE
by turning VOL.
Changes made from the car to a record in
If an audio source is active during an incoming In order to select the connected phone's ring
the mobile phone's telephone book will
call then it can be muted automatically. Acti- signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu result in a new record in the car's telephone
vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone Phone settings Sounds and volume book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the
menu Phone settings Sounds and Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal. phone. From the car, this will now look like
you have double records, with different
volume Mute radio/media. icons. Note also that when a shortcut num-
ber is saved or a change to a contact is 06
Phone book
Ring volume made, this will result in a new record in the
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone There are two phone books. These are merged car's phone book.
into one in the car and are displayed as a single
settings Sounds and volume Ring phone book in the car.
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/ All use of the phone book requires that the
MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT • The car downloads the mobile phone's symbol appears at the top of the TV
to save. phone book and only displays this phone
screen and that the handsfree function is in
book when the mobile phone from which
phone mode.
3 Not supported by all mobile phones.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone that the contact searched for starts with. For Key Function
book from each paired mobile phone. The example, a long press on the button for 6 gives
phone book can be copied automatically to the instant access to that part of the list where the +0pw
audio system during each connection. contacts with the letter M are located.
– Activate/deactivate the function in phone Character table keypad in centre #*
mode under Phone menu Phone console
settings Download phone book.
Key Function Searching for contacts
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the TV Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
screen.
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain
a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select and DEFÈÉ3
press OK/MENU to call.
GHIÌ4
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the sym-
bol ! appears to the right of the contact then JKL5
06 there are several phone numbers stored for the
contact. Press OK/MENU to show the num- Search contacts using the text wheel.
MNOÖØÑÒ6
bers. Change and dial a number other than that Character list
selected by default by turning TUNE. Press
PQRSß7 Changing the input mode (see table below)
OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the cen- Phone book
TUVÜÙ8
tre console's keypad to key in the start of the To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
contact's name (see "Character table keypad mode to Phone menu Phone book
in centre console" for button functions). WXYZ9
Search.
The list of contacts can also be accessed from
Shift between upper and lower
normal view by pressing and holding the button
case letter.
on the centre console's keypad with the letter

NOTE 123/ Change between letters and New contact

There is no text wheel for High Performance, ABC numbers with OK/MENU.
so TUNE cannot be used there to input
characters: only the digit and letter buttons More Change to special characters
on the control panel in the centre console with OK/MENU.
can be used for this.
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press press OK/MENU to see the
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and saved numbers and other infor-
letter buttons on the control panel in the mation.
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
result of the search is shown in the phone acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered Entering letters for New contact.
book (3). characters. Changing the input mode (see table below)
3. To change the input mode to numbers or By pressing a number key in the centre console
Input field
special characters, or to go to the phone when the text wheel is shown (see illustration
book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see above), a new character list (1) appears in the New contacts can be added in phone mode
explanation in the table below) in the list for TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the under Phone menu Phone book New
changing the input mode (2), press OK/ number key to the desired letter and then contact. 06
MENU. release. Continue with the next letter and so
on. When a button is depressed the entry is
NOTE
confirmed when another button is depressed.
There is no text wheel for High Performance,
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding so TUNE cannot be used there to input
number key. characters: only the digit and letter buttons
on the control panel in the centre console
can be used for this.

1. When the Name row is selected, press 123/ Change between letters and ing a number key and then pressing OK/
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus- ABC numbers with OK/MENU. MENU. If there is no contact stored on the
tration above). speed dial number then an option is shown to
More Change to special characters save a contact to the selected speed dial num-
2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
with OK/MENU. ber.
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the OK Save and go back to Add con- Receiving a vCard
centre console can also be used. tact with OK/MENU. It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The phone book from other mobile phones (other
Change between uppercase and than the one currently connected to the car). In
name entered is shown in the input field (2)
lowercase letters with OK/ order to allow this the car is set to visible mode
in the TV screen.
MENU. for Bluetooth. The function is activated in
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
Press OK/MENU, the cursor phone mode under Phone menu Phone
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn moves to the input field (2) at the book Receive vCard.
TUNE to one of the options (see explana- top of the TV screen. The cursor
tion in the table below) in the list (1) and can now be moved, with TUNE, Memory status
then press OK/MENU. to the appropriate place to e.g. Memory status of the car's phone book and the
insert new letters or delete with connected mobile phone's phone book can be
When the name has been fully entered, select EXIT. To be able to insert new seen in phone mode under Phone menu
OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press letters first go back to the input Phone book Memory status.
06
OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone mode, by pressing OK/MENU.
number in the same way as above. Delete phone book
When the telephone number has been entered, Speed dial numbers The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
press OK/MENU and select a telephone num- Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers carried out in phone mode under Phone menu
ber type (Mobile phone, Home, Work or under Phone menu Phone book Speed Phone book Clear phone book.
General). Press OK/MENU to confirm. dial.
When all details have been filled in, select Save Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per-
contact in the menu to save the contact. formed in phone mode using the number keys
on the keypad in the centre console, by press-

NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only dele-
tes contacts in the car's telephone book.
Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book
are not deleted.
Version information Bluetooth

The car's current Bluetooth version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06

Voice recognition* mobile phone
General WARNING Language

The infotainment system's voice recognition1 The driver always holds overall responsibil-
allows the driver to voice-activate certain func- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
tions in a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and complying with all applicable rules of
or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and the road.
Traffic Information System).
The voice recognition system allows the driver
NOTE to voice-activate certain functions of a
• The information in this section Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and in
describes the use of voice commands Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
to control a mobile phone connected Traffic Information System), while the driver
using Bluetooth. For detailed infor- can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
mation on using a mobile phone con- same time. The input data are in dialogue form Language list.
nected using Bluetooth with the car's with spoken commands from the user and ver-
Infotainment system see page 261. bal replies from the system. The voice recog- Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
nition system uses the same microphone as guages. Languages available for voice recog-
• The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road nition are marked with an icon in the language
and Traffic Information System) has a the Bluetooth handsfree system (see illustra-
tion on page 261) and the voice recognition list - . Changing the language is performed
separate user manual which contains
more information on voice control and system's replies come via the car's speakers. in the menu system MY CAR, see page 202.
06
voice commands to control that sys-
tem.
Voice commands offer convenience and help

the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).

Remember Keep the following things in mind when you use Help functions for voice recognition
the voice recognition system: • Instructions: A function that helps you get
familiar with the system and the procedure
• For a command - speak after the tone, with for giving commands.
normal voice at normal speed.
• Do not speak while the system is replying • Voice training: A function that enables the
(the system cannot understand commands voice recognition system to learn to know
during this time). your voice and your accent. The function
provides an opportunity to voice train two
• The car's doors, windows and sunroof* user profiles.
must be closed.
The help functions can be accessed by press-
• Avoid background noise in the passenger ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in
compartment. the centre console and then turning TUNE to
the desired menu option.
Steering wheel keypad. NOTE
Instructions
Button for voice recognition If the driver is unsure of which command to The instructions can be started in two ways:
use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system
To activate the system then responds with a few different com-
mands which can be used in the current sit- NOTE
Before voice commands to a mobile phone can
uation. This instruction and voice training can only
be used the mobile phone must be paired and
connected via Bluetooth handsfree. If a tele- Voice commands can be disabled by: be started when the car is parked. 06
phone command is given and no mobile phone • saying "Cancel"
is paired, then the system will provide informa-
• not speaking • Press the button for Voice recognition and
tion about this. For information on pairing and say "Voice instructions".
connecting a mobile phone, see page 262. • a long press on the steering wheel but-
ton for Voice recognition • Activate the instructions in the menu sys-
• Press the button for voice recognition (1) in tem MY CAR under Settings Voice
order to activate the system and initiate a
• Press EXIT or another main source but-
settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip-
ton (e.g. MEDIA).
dialogue with voice commands. The sys- tion of the menu system, see page 200.
tem will then display commonly used com-
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
mands in the TV screen in the centre con-
which take around 5 minutes in total to com-
sole.
plete. The system starts with the first lesson.

To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press Using voice commands For a description of the menu system, see
the button for voice recognition and say The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice page 200.
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by say- commands by pressing the button for voice
ing "Previous". Dial a number
recognition (see illustration on page 271).
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
Exit the instructions by means of a long press Once a dialogue has been started, commonly to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced
on the button for voice recognition. used commands will be shown in the TV individually, in groups of several numbers at a
Voice training screen. Greyed-out text or text within brackets time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for is not included in the spoken command. greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the
you to say. Voice training can be started in the When the driver becomes accustomed to the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not pos-
menu system MY CAR under Settings system, he/she can speed up the command sible.
Voice settings Voice training. Choose dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys- The following is an example of a dialogue with
between User 1 or User 2. For a description tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice voice commands. The system's reply will vary
of the menu system, see page 200. recognition. depending on the situation.
After voice training has been completed, Commands can be given in several ways The user starts the dialogue by saying:
remember to set your user profile under Voice The command "Phone call contact" can be Phone > call number
user setting. pronounced as e.g.: or
Additional settings in MY CAR • "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait Phone call number
06 • User setting - Two user profiles can be for the system's reply, and then continue
set, the function is activated in the menu by saying "Call contact." System reply
Number?
system MY CAR under Settings Voice or
settings Voice user setting. Choose User action
• "Phone call contact" - Say the whole com- Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
between User 1 or User 2. For a descrip- mand in one sequence.
tion of the menu system, see page 200. i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number.
Quick commands If you say several numbers and pause, the sys-
• Voice volume - Can be changed in the tem will repeat them, and then say "Continue".
menu system MY CAR under Settings Quick commands for the phone can be found
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
Voice settings Voice output volume.
For a description of the menu system, see Voice settings Voice command list finish the command by saying "Call".
page 200. Phone commands and General commands. • You can also change the number by saying
the commands "Correct" (which deletes

the last spoken group of numbers) or play in the numbered rows and the system
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken prompts you to select a row number.
phone number). • If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
Dialling from the call register
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the list
The following dialogue allows you to make a
(and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in
phone call from one of your mobile phone's call the list).
registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying: Calling voice mailbox
Phone > call from the call register The following dialogue allows you to call your
voice mailbox to check if you have received
or any messages. The phone number for your
Phone call from the call register voice mailbox must be registered in the
Bluetooth function, see page 264.
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts. The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
Call a contact
or
The following dialogue allows you to call your
pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone. Phone call voice mailbox
The user starts the dialogue by saying: Continue by responding to the system's 06
Phone > call contact prompts.
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
• If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the dis-

TV*
General IMPORTANT cut menu is shown with commonly used

menu options.
A TV licence is required for this product in
NOTE some countries. Station presets, numeric input.
This system only supports TV transmissions Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn-
in countries which transmit signals in
Menus ing TUNE.
mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T stand-
ard. The system does not support TV trans- The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the Confirm your selection or go to the menu
missions in mpeg-4 format or analogue centre console and the steering wheel key- by pressing OK/MENU.
transmissions. pad*. For general information on menu naviga-
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops
tion, see page 236 and menu overview, see
the function in progress.
page 240.
NOTE The next available channel is shown by
The TV picture is only shown when the car pressing / .
Overview
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disap- NOTE
pears, No visual media available while
driving appears on the display screen, If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
although the audio is heard during this time. keypad* and/or remote control* then in
The picture reappears when the car has many cases these can be used instead of
stopped. the buttons in the centre console. For a
06 description of the steering wheel keypad,
Cars with RSE do not shut off the rear see page 234. For a description of the
screens. remote control, see page 278.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality Centre console control panel.
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage iPod or TV) is activated. If a source is acti-
level can also vary depending on where in vated and you press MEDIA then a short-
the country you are located.

TV*
Watch TV NOTE set is shown. When the scan is com-

– Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is shown plete a message is shown and the pic-
If no reception is available on the preset ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre-
in the TV screen, press OK/MENU. buttons, it may be because the car is at a sets) has now been created and is avail-
> A search starts and after a short while location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if the car able. To change channel, see
the most recently used channel is
was driven from Germany to France. A new page 275.
shown.
selection of country and a new search may The scan and preset storage can be cancelled
Changing channel then need to be carried out.
with EXIT.
It is possible to change channel as follows:
• Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels Searching TV channels/Preset list Channel management
in the area is shown. If any of these chan- 1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU. The preset list can be edited. You can change
nels is already saved as a preset then its
the order of the channels that are shown in the
preset number is shown to the right of the 2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
preset list. A TV channel can have more than
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to MENU.
one place in the preset list. The TV channel
reach the desired channel and press OK/
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press positions can also vary in the preset list.
MENU.
OK/MENU.
• By pressing the preset buttons (0-9). To change the order in the preset list, go in TV
> If one or more countries have previously mode to TV menu Reorganise presets.
• Via a short press on the / buttons been selected then they are shown in a
the next available channel in the area is list. 1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to 06
shown. move in the list and confirm with OK/
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or
MENU.
one of the previously selected countries.
NOTE Press OK/MENU. > The selected channel is highlighted.
If the car has been moved within the coun- > A list of all available countries is shown. 2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
try, for example, from one city to another, it and confirm with OK/MENU.
is not certain that the presets are available 5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
at the new location as the frequency range Sweden) and press OK/MENU. > The channels change places with each
may have changed. In which case, carry out other.
> An automatic scan for available TV
a new search and save a new preset list, see After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the
the function "Save the available TV channels channels starts, this scan takes a little
as presets", page 276. while. During this time the figure for other channels available in the area. It is pos-
each channel found and added as a pre-

TV*
sible to move a channel up to a place in the area where you are. When a channel is found, Information about the current
preset list. it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before programme
scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with Press the INFO button in order to display the
Save the available TV channels as EXIT, then the channel that you just watched information about the current programme, the
presets continues to be shown. Scanning does not next programme and its start time. If the
If the car has been moved within the country, affect the preset list. INFO button is pressed once more then addi-
for example, from one city to another, it is not
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu tional information on the current programme
certain that the presets are available at the new
Scan. can sometimes be displayed, such as start and
location as the frequency range may have
end times and a brief description of the current
changed. In which case, carry out another scan
programme. For more information on the
and save a new preset list. Teletext INFO button, see page 233.
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU. It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
To return to the TV picture, wait several sec-
steps:
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ onds or press EXIT.
MENU. 1. Press the button on the remote con-
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/ trol. Picture settings
MENU. 2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the The settings for brightness and contrast can be
> An automatic scan for available TV number keys (0-9) to select page. adjusted. For more information, see page 254.
channels starts, this scan takes a little > The page is shown automatically.
06 while. During this time the figure for The reception is lost
Enter new page number, or press the remote
each channel found and added as a pre-
control buttons / to go to the next page. If the reception for the TV channel that is being
set is shown. When the scan is com-
shown disappears then the picture will freeze.
plete a message is shown and the pic- Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing Shortly after this a message appears informing
ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre- the button on the remote control. that the reception has been lost for the current
sets) has now been created and is avail-
It is also possible to control the teletext with the TV channel, and a new search for the channel
able. To change channel, see
coloured buttons on the remote control. continues. When the reception returns the dis-
page 275.
play of the TV channel starts immediately. It is
Scanning the TV channels possible to change channel at any time when
This function automatically scans through the the message is shown.
frequency range for all channels available in the If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has

TV*
detected that there is no reception for all TV

channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance with
"Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 275.
06

Remote control*
General* The remote control can be used for all func- functions
tions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as Key Function
the buttons in the centre console or steering Change between:
wheel keypad*.
L = Rear left TV screen*
When using the remote control, first press the
remote control's button to position F. F = Front TV screen
Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver, R = Rear right TV screen*
which is located to the right of the INFO button
(see page 233) in the centre console. Change to navigation*
If the car is fitted with rear TV screens* and you

want to operate one of these, select the Change to radio source (AM,
required TV screen with the button on the
FM1 etc.)
remote control. Then aim the remote control at Change to media source (Disc,
the IR receiver for the TV screen to be oper- TV* etc.)
ated, see page 280.
Change to Bluetooth hands-
WARNING free*
06
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
cameras, remote controls for accessories, song.
etc. in the glove compartment or other com-
partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- Play/pause
ple in the car in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
Stop
NOTE Scroll/fast forward, change

Do not expose the remote control to direct track/song.
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - oth-
erwise problems may arise with the batter- Menu
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con- ies.
sole.

Remote control*
Key Function Key Function

To previous, cancels function, Subtitles, selection of language
deletes input characters for text
Navigate up/down Teletext*, On/Off
Navigate right/left
Replacing the battery in the remote
Confirm selection or go to the control
menu system for the selected
source NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and 1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
Volume, decrease
depends on how much the remote control and slide the battery cover in the direction
is used. of the infrared lens.
Volume, increase 2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
The remote control is powered by four batter- batteries in accordance with the symbols
0-9 Preset channels, number and let- ies of the AA/LR6 type. in the battery compartment and fit them.
ter input 3. Refit the cover.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey. 06
Shortcuts for favourite setting.
NOTE
Information about the current Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batter-
ies in an environmentally safe manner.
programme, song, etc. Also used
when there is more information
available than can be shown in
the TV screen.
Selection of language for sound-

track

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*
Overview
TV screen General However, only one disc at a time can be played

The RSE system is a system for rear-seat in the media player. It is possible to play back
Headphones socket
entertainment that makes it possible to e.g. music from e.g. an iPod or steaming audio
06 On/Off button watch video, play music, listen to the radio, files via Bluetooth.
watch TV* or connect other external devices The RSE system can be controlled from the
A/V-AUX input (e.g. a games console). front TV screen (parental control).
Remote control The RSE system is fully integrated with the It is possible to display or play back various
Headphones car's infotainment system and can be used media from different sources on each TV
simultaneously with other functions of the info- screen. It is also possible to display or play
IR receiver/transmitter tainment system. back media from the same source on one or
When the rear seat passengers are using e.g. more of the TV screens (front, right rear and left
A/V-AUX or watching TV* while listening with rear). It is not possible to play back video from
headphones, the driver and front seat passen-
ger can still use the car's radio or media player.

USB while a CD or DVD disc is being played NOTE Wireless headphones

back.
For prolonged use (more than 10 minutes)
with the engine switched off, the capacity of
IMPORTANT the vehicle's battery may fall to such a low
When loading luggage and large objects in level that it is not possible to start the
the vehicle, ensure that sufficient space is engine.
left for the TV screens in the head restraints, In this case a message will be displayed on
so that the TV screens are not scratched or the screen.
damaged. Cover the TV screens with appro-
priate covering material during loading.
Menus
The menus for RSE are controlled using the
NOTE remote control. For general information on
The TV screens and remote control do not menu navigation and menu structures, see
work at very low or high temperatures - they page 286. Control for channel A (CH.A) or channel B
only "come alive" after the climate control (CH.B)
system has created an acceptable operat- On/Off button
ing temperature in the passenger compart- Remote control
ment. The RSE system is equipped with a remote Volume
control. Using this it is possible to control the
functions for each TV screen. The remote con- Indicator lamp On/Off 06
NOTE trol can also be used to control other functions The RSE system includes two wireless head-
Clean the lens on the IR receiver regularly in the infotainment system, even from the rear phones.
with a damp cloth, a dirty lens affects seat.
remote control function. The wireless headphones are activated with
For information on the remote control, see the On/Off button (2), an indicator lamp illumi-
page 278. nates (4). Select CH.A (channel A) or CH.B
Power consumption, ignition positions
(channel B) using the control (1). Adjust the vol-
The system can be activated in ignition position
ume using the volume control (3).
I or II and while the engine is running. When the
car is being started the film stops temporarily The headphones are automatically switched
and continues when the engine has started. off after about 3 minutes if they are not used.

Battery replacement in wireless Headphones socket Connection of A/V-AUX input

headphones It is possible to connect external headphones
The headphones are powered by two batteries via the headphones socket (3.5 mm) on the
of the AAA model. side of the head restraints, see the illustration
Take along extra batteries for a long journey. on page 280. The volume is controlled using
the remote control.
A/V-AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V

The input allows you to connect other equip-
ment. Always follow the instructions included
with the external equipment, or from the man-
ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-
ment connected via the A/V-AUX input can use The A/V-AUX input is located under the armrest in
the TV screens, wireless headphones, head- the tunnel console.
phones sockets and the car's speakers.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow
socket.
NOTE
Wireless headphones. 2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the
The customer is responsible that equipment white socket and the right-hand one to the
06 1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery connected to the A/V-AUX input or head-
phones socket does not cause interference red socket.
cover.
in the vehicle's RSE system. 3. Connect the power cable to the electrical
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new socket if your equipment is designed for 12
batteries in accordance with the symbols V.
in the battery compartment and insert
them. Always follow the instructions for the external
equipment when connecting.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
For electrical socket location, see page 227
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries
in an environmentally safe manner.

Playing back audio/video via the A/V- Settings from the front TV screen 1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to scroll down to
AUX input RSE on the TV screen, confirm selection
1. Switch on the rear TV screen by means with OK/MENU.
pressing the On/Off button on the TV 2. Turn TUNE to select the right, left-hand or
screen. both TV screens, and confirm with OK/
MENU.
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
on the TV screen and press , turn 3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or
RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to con-
TUNE to A/V AUX , confirm selection with
firm.
.
4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (e.g.
3. Switch on the connected device and press Disc) and confirm with OK/MENU. The
PLAY or equivalent on the connected selected source will start automatically (if
device. e.g. a disc is in the media player).
MEDIA Cancel and go back with EXIT.
Input volume
The input volume is adjusted in the menu under TUNE The remote control can also be used for set-
A/V AUX input volume. tings. For more information on the remote con-
OK/MENU trol, see page 278.
To activate the system EXIT
Parental control for the TV* 06
The RSE system can be activated from either It is possible to set a permitted age limit for the
the front or rear TV screen. Selection of source in the rear TV
TV, so that only programmes for the appropri-
screens ate age can be viewed. The setting is activated
From the front TV screen, press MEDIA, turn From the front TV screen it is possible to select
TUNE and select RSE, confirm with OK/ for both TV screens.
the source (what shall be displayed or played
MENU. back) for the right and left-hand rear TV Activate under RSE settings TV parental
From the rear TV screen, by means of pressing screens respectively. It is possible select the control, in accordance with point 2-4 in the
the On/Off button on the rear TV screen and same source for both or different sources for section "Selection of source in the rear TV
then pressing or on the remote the right and left-hand TV screens respectively. screens", see page 283. Choose between Age
control, turn TUNE and select a source (e.g. 0-6, Age 7-13, Age 14-18 and No parental
Disc), confirm selection with . control.
``

Audio off TV screen settings1 rear TV screen Normal - The image is shown in its normal
It is possible to mute the two rear TV screens When playing back video files and displaying mode (normally 4:3 or 16:9 format).
from the front TV screen. The function is acti- TV* a pop-up menu is available by means of Zoom - Full screen used but parts of the image
vated under RSE settings Mute, in accord- pressing on the remote control. The pop- are cut off.
ance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of up menu has different content depending on
source in the rear TV screens", see page 283. Screen fit - Full screen used but image pro-
what is being played back or displayed.
portions may be slightly distorted.
TV screen off Day/Night mode Unless otherwise stated the image is displayed
It is possible to switch off the video for the two The TV screen can be set in three different in the screen format Normal.
rear TV screens from the front TV screen. The modes for different light conditions. Choose
function is activated under RSE settings between Auto, Day and Night. Press on the remote control and change
Display off, in accordance with point 2-4 in the the mode under Screen format on the TV
Press on the remote control and change screen. For general information on menu navi-
section "Selection of source in the rear TV
screens", see page 283. the mode under Day/Night mode on the TV gation and menu structures, see page 286.
screen. For general information on menu navi-
Press one of the remote control's numeric keys gation and menu structures, see page 286. Source menu
(0 - 9) to switch on the TV screen again. The TV What is shown in the pop-up menu for the
screen is also switched to the On mode when Picture settings source menu depends on what is being played
the ignition is switched on. You can adjust the settings for brightness, con- back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data
trast, shade and colour. menu or USB menu. For general information
06 Switching off the remote control (front) on menu navigation and menu structures, see
It is possible to switch off the IR receiver for the Press on the remote control and change
page 286.
front TV screen, which means that the remote the mode under Image settings on the TV
control cannot be used for the front TV screen. screen. For general information on menu navi- DVD disc's menu2
The function is activated under RSE settings gation and menu structures, see page 286. If a DVD video disc is played back then this
Disable remote control (front), in accord- menu option is shown in the pop-up menu. For
Display format
ance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of general information on menu navigation and
It is possible to choose between display for-
source in the rear TV screens", see page 283. menu structures, see page 286.
mats Normal, Zoom and Screen fit.
1 Only available for playing back video files and displaying TV*.

Menu settings from the rear TV screen TV settings* 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
For general information on menu navigation CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for
Searching TV channels/Preset list right-hand screen.
and menu structures, see page 286.
See page 275. 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver
Random3 on the TV screen and press , turn
Save the available TV channels as
See page 253. TUNE to desired source (Disc, USB,
presets
See page 276. AUX etc.), confirm selection with .
Repeat folder4
See page 253. 3. Insert a CD disc in the car's media player
Scanning the TV channels or connect an external audio source via the
DivX Video On Demand4 See page 276. car's USB port/AUX input or via Blue-
The media player can be registered in order to tooth.
play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or Music, video, radio and TV* Playback and navigation in playlists
USB. The code for registration is available in Rotate the scroll wheel on the remote control
disc mode or USB mode under DivX® VOD Playing back music
to access the playlist/folder structure.
code. For more information visit It is possible to play back music from disc
tracks/audio files via the car's media player, either gives confirmation of subfolder selection
www.divx.com/vod.
USB port/AUX input or via streaming audio files or starts playing back the selected disc track/
USB hub audio file. It is also possible to play back the
from a Bluetooth-connected phone.
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB disc track/audio file using on the remote
connection, see page 257. NOTE control and change the disc tracks/audio file 06
using / . Stop playback using
The system only supports one iPod user at .
a time in the navigation mode (playlist).
For more information, see page 252.
For more information about media players,
Watching video
USB/AUX and Media Bluetooth, see the
It is possible to watch video from disc tracks/
pages 251, 255 and 258.
video files via the car's media player or USB
port.
3 Applies to CD-Audio, CD/DVD discs, USB and iPod.

4 Applies to CD/DVD discs and USB.

For more information about media players and Listening to radio press / , the next/previous
USB, see the pages 251 and 255. It is possible to listen to radio via the car's channel available in the area is displayed.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select radio. For more information on the TV, see page 274.
CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
right-hand screen. CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for Menu navigation RSE
2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver right-hand screen.
on the TV screen and press , turn 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver General
TUNE to desired source (Disc or USB), on the TV screen and press , turn The RSE menus are operated both from the
confirm selection with . TUNE to desired source (AM, FM1, front TV screen, and from either of the rear TV
DAB1* etc.), confirm selection with . screens. From the front TV screen it is possible
3. Insert a DVD disc in the car's media player to both activate a source for a rear TV screen,
or connect an external source via the car's 3. Select a station with one of the preset but- and to make certain settings for the two rear TV
USB port. tons (0 - 9) on the remote control or press screens.
Playback and navigation / , the radio will search for the
Play back disc track/video file using on next/previous available station.
RSE menus front TV screen
the remote control and change disc track/ For more information on the radio, see
To access the menu RSE must first be selected
video file using / . Stop playback page 244.
under MEDIA via the front TV screen. Then
using . For more information about play- press OK/MENU to access the menu. Turn
Watching TV*
06 back and navigation of DVD video discs, see It is possible to watch TV via the car's media TUNE to the desired selection and confirm with
page 253 and for video files, see page 252. player. OK/MENU. The remote control and steering
Fast forward/reverse wheel keypad can also be used.
1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select
Start fast forward/rewind by means of a long CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for It is possible to make settings for either right or
press on the buttons / . Then right-hand screen. left-hand TV screen or both TV screens.
increase fast forward/rewind speed by short 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver Left RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen
presses the buttons. Audio files are fast for-
on the TV screen and press , turn menu and Both RSE screen menus:
warded/rewound at one speed, while video
TUNE to TV, confirm selection with .
files can be fast forwarded/rewound at four dif-
Power off/Power on
ferent speeds. Fast forward/rewind is stopped 3. Select a channel with one of the preset
by pressing -, - or the equivalent buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or RADIO
opposite / button. MEDIA

RSE settings RSE menus rear TV screens Reset disc settings

Mute Press on the remote control when a
RSE CD/DVD Data menu
Display off source (e.g. Disc) is selected in order to access Disc menu
the RSE menus for the rear TV screen.
Disable remote control (front) Random
Menu selections are made using the scroll
TV parental control wheel and the buttons on the remote control. Repeat folder
Reset all RSE settings For information on the remote control, see DivX® VOD code
page 278.
Day/Night mode
Pop-up menu RSE5 RADIO Display off
Press on the remote control when a Reset disc settings
video file is being played back or the TV* is Menu valid for AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1* and
being displayed in order to access the pop-up DAB2*: RSE DVD Video menu
menu. Menu selections are made using the DVD Video Menu
scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote Day/Night mode
DVD disc menu
control. For information on the remote control, Display off
see page 278. Subtitles
Reset all RSE settings
Audio tracks
Screen format 06
MEDIA Advanced settings
Image settings
Day/Night mode
Day/Night mode RSE CD Audio menu
Disc menu Display off
Source menu6
Random Reset disc settings
DVD disc menu7
Day/Night mode
Display off

6 What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
``

RSE USB menu RSE iPod menu

USB menu iPod menu
Random Random
Repeat folder Day/Night mode
DivX® VOD code Display off
Select USB device Reset iPod settings
Day/Night mode
RSE Bluetooth menu
Display off Bluetooth menu
Reset USB settings Random
RSE AUX menu Day/Night mode

AUX menu Display off
AUX input volume Reset Bluetooth settings
Day/Night mode
RSE TV menu*
Display off TV menu
06 Reset AUX settings Select country
RSE A/V-AUX menu Autostore

A/V AUX menu Scan
A/V AUX input volume Day/Night mode
Day/Night mode Display off
Display off Reset TV settings
Reset AUX settings

06
289
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 292
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 295
Fuel....................................................................................................... 296
Loading................................................................................................. 299
Cargo area............................................................................................ 302
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 305
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 311
290
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
General For more information and further advice, see IMPORTANT

the pages 12 and 382.
Economical driving Engine damage can occur if water enters
Driving economically means driving smoothly the air filter.
WARNING
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
style and speed to the prevailing conditions. Never switch off the engine while moving, enter the transmission. This reduces the
such as downhill, this deactivates important lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted systems such as the power steering and the service life of these systems.
to the current traffic situation and road - brake servo.
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel In the event of the engine stalling in water,
consumption. do not try restart - tow the car from the water
Driving in water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
• Avoid driving with open windows. The car can be driven through water at a maxi- shop is recommended. Risk of engine
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of breakdown.
and heavy braking. 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
• Remove unnecessary items from the car - when passing through flowing water. Engine, gearbox and cooling system
the greater the load the higher the fuel con- During driving in water, maintain a low speed Under special conditions, for example hard
sumption. and do not stop the car. When the water has driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly a risk that the engine and drive system may
can take place without risk to other road and check that full brake function is achieved. overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
users. Water and mud for example can make the For information about overheating when driv-
• A roof load and ski box increase air resis- brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake ing with a trailer, see page 305.
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption function.
- remove the load carriers when not in use. • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric of the grille when driving in hot climates.
• Do not run the engine to operating tem- engine block heater and trailer coupling
07
perature at idling speed, but rather drive after driving in water and mud. • If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high the instrument panel's
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
• Do not let the car stand with water over the warning symbol is illuminated and there is
sills for any long period of time - this could a text message displayed there High
warm one. cause electrical malfunctions. engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in
• A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine in a safe way and allow the engine to run at
combination with a 6-speed manual gear- idling speed for several minutes to cool
box is started in 2nd gear. down.
292
• If the text message High engine temp Open tailgate least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop effective during driving than running the
engine is shown then the engine must be WARNING engine at idling speed while stationary.
switched off after stopping the car.
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic Before a long journey
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
a built-in protection function is activated • Check that the engine is working normally
through the cargo area. and that fuel consumption is normal.
which, amongst other things, illuminates
the instrument panel's warning symbol and • Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
there is a text message displayed there Do not overload the battery or other fluid).
Transmission hot Reduce speed or The electrical functions in the car load the bat- • Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Transmission hot Stop safely - follow tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
the recommendation given and lower the position II when the engine is switched off. • Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
speed and stop the car in a safe way and Instead use the I mode - which uses less
allow the engine to run at idling speed for power. Winter driving
a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool Check the following in particular before the
Also, be aware of different accessories that
down. cold season:
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning which use a lot of power when the engine is
may be switched off temporarily. • The engine coolant must contain at least
switched off. Examples of such functions are: 50% glycol. This mixture protects the
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you
• ventilation fan engine against frost erosion down to
stop after a hard drive. approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum
• headlamps antifreeze protection, different types of gly-
NOTE • windscreen wiper col must not be mixed.
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to • audio system (high volume). • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
operate for a while after the engine has been If the battery voltage is low the information dis- condensation. 07
switched off. play shows the text Low battery Power save • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
mode. The energy-saving function then shuts lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
down certain functions or reduces certain ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or consumption while the engine is cold. For
audio system. more information on suitable oils, see
page 379.
– In which case, charge the battery by star-
ting the engine and then running it for at
293
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
• The condition of the battery and charge

level must be inspected. Cold weather pla-
ces great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
• Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
07 reacts.
294
Refuelling
Refuelling Opening the fuel filler flap manually Opening/closing the fuel cap
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
when electric opening from the passenger the event of high outside temperatures. Open
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the compartment is not possible. the cap slowly.
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button
is released. 1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo • After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate until one or more clicking sounds are
The arrow on the information display's the green cord with handle. heard.
symbol reminds which side of the car
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
the fuel filler cap is located. Filling up with fuel
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
• Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until • Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
a click confirms that it is closed. IMPORTANT 07
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is NOTE
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
295
Fuel
General information on fuel IMPORTANT Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
by Volvo must not be used as engine power intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
and fuel consumption is negatively affected. guarantees, and any associated service economy.
agreement. This applies to all engines. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
WARNING NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- value is fed into an electronic system that con-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes. tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
NOTE to air directed to the engine is continuously
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek conditions for efficient combustion, and
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
medical attention. nation with fuel grade are factors that could together with the three-way catalytic converter
affect the car's performance. reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
Catalytic converters
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical Petrol
attention immediately if fuel has been swal- The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
lowed. purify exhaust gases. They are located close to Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most
the engine so that operating temperature is engines can be run with octane ratings of 95
reached quickly. and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should
WARNING 91 RON be used.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel • 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
ignited. walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
07 Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, formance and minimum fuel consumption.
ting to refuel. i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
Never carry an activated mobile phone ical reaction without being used up them-
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause selves.
recommended for optimum performance and
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
fuel economy.
leading to fire and injury.
296
Fuel
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT to carry out a check. Do this before starting the

engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
• Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel:
not to damage the catalytic converter. diesel standard.
• Do not use additives not recommended The sulphur content must be a maximum of
switch and push it in to the end position
by Volvo. 50 ppm.
(see page 78).
2. Press the START button without depress-
Diesel IMPORTANT ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- Diesel type fuels that must not be used: 3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel • Special additives 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand- or clutch pedal and then press the
ards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contami-
• Marine diesel fuel
START button again.
nants in the fuel, such as excessively high vol- • Heating oil
umes of sulphur particles for example. • FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and NOTE
vegetable oil.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in shortage:
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel accordance with Volvo recommendations
fuel designed for low temperatures around
and generate increased wear and engine • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
damage that is not covered by the Volvo possible - if the car is tilting there is a
freezing point is available from the major oil warranty. risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate. Empty tank Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine The fuel filter separates condensation from the
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- 07
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When tank may need to be vented in the workshop in tion.
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel order to restart the engine after fuelling.
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
gent and water. vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
297
Fuel
or if you suspect that the car has been filled Soot filter full See manual is shown on the Fuel consumption and emissions of
with contaminated fuel. instrument panel display. carbon dioxide
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
IMPORTANT until the engine reaches normal operating tem- is equipped with extra equipment that affects
Certain special additives remove the water perature, preferably on a main road or motor- the car's weight. See information on weights
separation in the fuel filter. way. The car should then be driven for approx- page 374 and table page 382.
imately 20 minutes more. The manner in which the car is driven, and
Diesel particle filter (DPF) other non-technical factors can also affect fuel
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, NOTE consumption.
which results in more efficient emission con- A smaller reduction of engine power may be Consumption is higher and power output lower
trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col- noticed temporarily during regeneration. for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
lected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn When regeneration is complete the warning NOTE
away the particles and empty the filter. This text is cleared automatically.
requires the engine to have reached normal Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
operating temperature. Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
the engine reaches normal operating tempera- nation with fuel grade are factors that could
Regeneration of the filter is automatic and nor- ture more quickly. affect the car's performance.
mally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little
longer at a low average speed. Fuel consump-
tion may increase slightly during regeneration.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
Regeneration in cold weather be difficult to start the engine and the filter
If the car is frequently driven short distances in will be incapable of functioning. Then there
07 cold weather then the engine does not reach is a risk that the filter will have to be
normal operating temperature. This means that replaced.
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the
instrument panel illuminates, and the message

Loading
General information on loading • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- Front seat
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The lets with straps or web lashings. The passenger seat backrest can also be
total of the weight of the passengers and all folded for an extra long load, see page 80.
accessories reduces the car's payload by a WARNING
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a Roof load
mation on weights, see page 374. frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
The tailgate is opened via a button on the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Using load carriers
the lighting panel or the remote con- To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
trol key, see page 57. possible safety while driving, the load carriers
WARNING
designed by Volvo are recommended.
The protection provided by the inflatable
WARNING curtain in the headlining may be compro- Carefully follow the installation instructions
mised or eliminated by high loads. supplied with the carriers.
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution of • Never load cargo above the backrest. • Check periodically that the load carriers
the load. and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
WARNING • Distribute the load evenly over the load
To bear in mind when loading
Always secure the load. During heavy brak- carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
• Position the load firmly against the rear ing the load may otherwise shift, causing bottom.
seat's backrest. injury to the car's occupants.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
Note that objects must not prevent the function Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with and therefore fuel consumption, increase
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any something soft. with the size of the load.
of the rear seat's backrests is folded down,see
page 27.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
brake when loading/unloading long items. heavy braking and hard cornering. 07
• Centre the load. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as a drive position - and the car could then
WARNING
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on move off. The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
lowered backrests. racteristics are altered by roof loads. For
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to information on maximum permitted roof
avoid damaging the upholstery. load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 374.
299
Loading
Lowering the rear seat backrest Bag holder* 12 V electrical socket*

To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 82.
Load retaining eyelets
G017745
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor Lower the cover to access the electrical
hatch. socket.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the • The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
carrying handle in the hooks.
switch.
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the IMPORTANT
cargo area.
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
07 WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are NOTE
loose or protrude could cause injury during Remember that using the electrical socket
heavy braking. with the engine switched off involves the
Always secure large and heavy objects with risk of discharging the car's battery.
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Loading
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 325.
07
301
Cargo area
Safety net WARNING Take care to press forward the rod's retain-
ing hooks for each respective roof moun-
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly ting's front end position.
secured, even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
Attaching
NOTE
The safety net is most easily fitted via one of
the rear doors.
G034213
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. WARNING

A safety net prevents loads or pets from being Make sure that the upper mountings of the
thrown forward in the passenger compartment safety net are correctly fitted and that the Rear fitting.
anchoring straps are securely fastened.
in the event of sudden braking. For safety rea- 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
sons, the safety net must always be correctly Do not use a damaged net. roof mountings, hook the safety net's
fastened and secured. anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the cargo area.
can be secured two different locations in the the split upper rod is locked in extended
car: position.
• Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest 2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or
07
rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap
• Front fitting - Behind the front seat back- locks turned towards you.
rests.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof
mounting on the opposite side - the tele-
scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facil-
itate alignment.
302
Cargo area
IMPORTANT Break the rod in the centre, fold it together

and roll up the net.
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back-
wards against the safety net then the net The folded safety net can be stored under the
and/or its roof mountings could be dam- cargo compartment floor.
aged.
Safety grille*
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
Removal and storage
Front fitting.
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front

roof mountings, hook the safety net's
anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear
G031978
of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the
backrests are straightened and the seats
are moved forward slightly.
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
Pay attention to make sure that you do not being thrown forward in the passenger com-
press the seat/backrest hard against the partment in the event of sudden braking.
net when the seat/backrest is moved back The safety net can be easily removed and folded
again - only adjust until the seat/backrest up. Folding up
07
makes contact with the net. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
Release the tension in the net by pressing pull back/up.
in the button on the anchoring strap's lock
and feeding out part of the strap.
IMPORTANT
Press in the catch and detach both of the The safety grille cannot be folded up or
anchoring strap's hooks. down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Cargo area
Fitting/removal Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it – Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
The safety grille is normally permanently instal- into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts. its support shelves, and lower.
led in the car because it can easily be folded
up in the roof and so be out of the way if a IMPORTANT
longer cargo area is required. However, if
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and down when the cargo cover is fitted.
removed from the car.
For information about the tools required and Attaching the cargo cover
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation Move one end piece of the cover into the
instructions1 that were included with the initial recess on the side panel.
purchase.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
For safety reasons, the safety grille must ponding recess.
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted. Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disap-
pear.
Cargo cover*
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover

1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
07 Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing

disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
G031977
cargo area when it is fitted.
1 Installation instructions no. 30715972.

Driving with a trailer
General • For safety reasons, the maximum permit- stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The ted speed for the car when coupled with a which is normal.
total of the weight of the passengers and all trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted Trailer weights
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
speeds and weights. For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a weights, see page 375.
detailed information on weights, see
page 374. trailer up long, steep ascents.
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of NOTE
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
more than 12%. The stated maximum permitted trailer
the car is delivered with the necessary equip-
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
ment for driving with a trailer. Trailer cable National vehicle regulations can further limit
• The car's towing bracket must be of an An adapter is required if the car's towing trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
approved type. bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has certified for higher towing weights than the
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved car can actually tow.
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
for driving with a trailer. on the ground. WARNING
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the Direction indicators and brake lights on Follow the stated recommendations for
weight on the towing bracket complies the trailer trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
with the specified maximum towball load. may be difficult to control in the event of
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica-
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- tors are broken, then the combined instrument sudden movement and braking.
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes
pressure label location, see page 323. faster than normal and the display shows the
Manual gearbox
• The engine is loaded more heavily than text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
usual when driving with a trailer. Overheating 07
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at trailer text is shown. climate there may be a risk of overheating.
least 1000 km.
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
• The brakes are loaded much more than Level control* than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
usual on long and steep downhill slopes. The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant - otherwise the oil temperature may
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your height irrespective of the car's load (up to the become too high.
speed. maximum permissible weight). When the car is

Diesel engine 5-cyl 2. Activate the parking brake. WARNING

• In the event of a risk of overheating the 3. Move the gear selector to position P.
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant. 4. Release the foot brake. towbar:
• Move the gear selector to park position P • Follow the installation instructions care-
when parking an automatic car with a fully.
Automatic gearbox
hitched trailer. Always use the parking • The detachable section must be locked
Overheating brake. with the key before setting off.
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot • Block the wheels with chocks when park- • Check that the indicator window shows
climate there may be a risk of overheating. ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill. green.
• An automatic gearbox selects the optimum Starting on a hill
gear related to load and engine speed. Important checks
1. Depress the foot brake.
• In the event of overheating a warning sym- • The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
bol illuminates on the instrument panel 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- greased regularly.
combined with a text message - follow the tion D.
recommendation given. 3. Release the parking brake. NOTE
Steep inclines 4. Release the foot brake and start driving off. If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in used, it is not necessary to grease the tow-
a higher gear than the engine "can cope ball.
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive Towing bracket
at a high gear with low engine revolutions. If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose sec-
IMPORTANT tion must be followed carefully, see page 308.
07 See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
124.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
306
Storing the detachable towbar Specifications
G021485
G031713
Towbar storage space. Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
IMPORTANT A 1013
Always remove the towbar after use and B 69

store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap. C 855
D 428
E 109
F 296
07
G Side member
H Ball centre
307
Attaching the towbar
G021488
G021490
G018928
The indicator window must show red. The indicator window must show green.
Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch and then pulling the
cover straight back .
G021489
G000000
Insert the towbar until you hear a click. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
G021487
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
07
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
308
G021494
G021495
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling Safety cable. Push in the locking wheel and turn it
it up, down and back. anticlockwise until you hear a click.
WARNING
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it the correct place.
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT Removing the towbar

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and 07
upward.
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 307.
unlocked position.
309
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and NOTE

powerful side wind.
TSA function is switched off if the driver
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road selects Sport mode, see page 146.
surface or in a pothole.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements. TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
Operation steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
G018929
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or snaking because in such a situation the TSA
even impossible to suppress. This makes the system cannot determine whether it is the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
there is a risk that you could, for example, end The DSTC symbol in the combined
tight.
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. instrument panel flashes when the
TSA system continually monitors car move- TSA is working.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*
ments, particularly lateral movements. If snak-
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves ing is detected, the front wheels are individually
to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer
begins to snake. combination. This is often enough to help the
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system driver regain control of the car.
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
page 146. TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
Function combination is braked with all wheels and
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
07 combination is once again stable, the TSA sys-
occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is
a risk of it occurring at lower speeds tem stops regulating and the driver once again
(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the has full control of the car.
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. Miscellaneous
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a The TSA system can engage within the speed
triggering factor, e.g.: interval 60 to 160 km/h.

Towing and recovery
Towing WARNING lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for route must be as short as possible and then
The brake servo and power steering do not with very low speed.
towing before towing begins. work when the engine is switched off - the
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the brake pedal needs to be depressed In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
remote control key in the ignition switch about 5 times more heavily and the steering the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
is considerably heavier than normal. sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is ignation on the transmission's label under the
activated, see page 78 for more informa- Manual gearbox bonnet - see page 372. The designa-
tion on key positions. Prior to towing: tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – trans-
mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
2. The remote control key must remain in the – Move gear lever into neutral and release transmission.
ignition switch while the car is being towed. the parking brake.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing Automatic gearbox Geartronic IMPORTANT
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
Avoid towing.
gently pressed on the brake pedal -
IMPORTANT • However, the car can be towed for a
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
Note that the car must always be towed with short distance at low speed to move it
4. Be prepared to brake to stop. the wheels rolling forward. from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
WARNING • Cars with automatic gearbox must not
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
• Check that the steering lock is unlocked
further than 80 km.
be towed with the wheels rolling for-
before towing. ward.
• The remote control key must be in key
Prior to towing:
• In the event of moving a longer distance
position II - in position I all airbags are than 10 km, the car must be transported
07
deactivated. – Move the gear selector to position N and with the drive wheels raised from the
release the parking brake. road - professional recovery is recom-
• Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is mended.
being towed. Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission Prior to towing:
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient – Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
311
Towing and recovery
Jump starting Screw the towing eye right in up to its

Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged using the wheel wrench.
and the engine does not start, see page 119. After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
IMPORTANT
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
The catalytic converter may be damaged bumper.
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
IMPORTANT
Towing eye The towing eye is only designed for towing
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side Take out the towing eye that is located out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
of the bumper, front or rear. under the floor hatch in the cargo area - in
some cases it may be hidden under the sill.
Attaching the towing eye
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
NOTE
must be opened in different ways: On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing
eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket.
• Open the variant with a recess using a Attach the towrope in the towbar.
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the For this reason it is advisable to store the
cover completely and remove it. detachable towbar's towball in the car.
07 • The second variant has a marking along

one side or in a corner: Press the mark-
ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-
site side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
312
Towing and recovery
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor-
ted with the wheels rolling forward.
• An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised
front suspension must not be towed at
speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be
towed further than 50 km.
07
313
General ................................................................................................. 316
Changing wheels .................................................................................. 320
Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 323
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 324
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...................................................... 325

WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics Tyres with the greatest tread depth should New tyres
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- decrease the risk of skidding).
sure and speed rating are important for how the
car performs. NOTE
Direction of rotation Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 385.
Tyre care Tyres are perishable. After a few years they

begin to harden at the same time as the friction
Tyre age capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
G021778
All tyres older than 6 years old should be

checked by an expert even if they seem possible when you replace them. This is espe-
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- last four digits in the sequence mean the week
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed tion can therefore be affected. This applies to and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
to only turn in one direction have the direction all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam- DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must ples of external signs which indicate that the and this is stated with four digits, for example
always rotate in the same direction throughout tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol- 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched oration. tured in week 15 of 2010.
between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice Summer and winter tyres
versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's When summer and winter wheels are changed
08 braking characteristics and capacity to force the wheels should be marked with which side
rain and slush out of the way are adversely of the car they were mounted on, for example
affected. L for left and R for right.
316
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Wear and maintenance Tyres with tread wear indicators Only use rims that are tested and approved by
The correct tyre pressure results in more even Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
wear, see page 323. Driving style, tyre pres- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
sure, climate and road condition affect how
Locking wheel bolts*
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock-
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
able wheel bolts.
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo Tools
G021829
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) Tread wear indicators.
between tyres have already occurred, the least
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
bands across the width of the tread. On the
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
wards in a straight line rather than having the
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
sible complete loss of control over the car. This
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
to lose grip before the front wheels.
grip in rain and snow.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging Located under the cargo area floor are the
up - and not standing up. Rims and wheel bolts
car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the lock-
WARNING IMPORTANT able wheel bolts.
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control The wheel bolts must be tightened to 08
of the car. 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.

08 Wheels and tyres
General
Jack* IMPORTANT Tread depth

The original jack should only be used for Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread The tools and jack* must be stored in the peratures place considerably higher demands
intended location in the car's cargo area
must always be well greased. when not in use. on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-
fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
Tools - returning into place
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-
Winter tyres tres.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular Using snow chains
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent Snow chains may only be used on the front
on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all
four wheels. Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
NOTE wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo

G029336
WARNING
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
The tools and jack* must be returned to their tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
correct places after use. The jack needs to be Studded tyres uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
cranked together to the correct position in Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
order to have space. 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into wrong snow chains may cause serious
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the damage to your car and lead to an accident.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out. studs, a longer service life.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam IMPORTANT

NOTE
block. It must point forwards in the car. Only single-sided snow chains are permit-
The legal provisions for the use of studded ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or sim-
tyres vary from country to country. ilar that are properly suited to the car model,
08
tyre size and wheel rim size. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.

08 Wheels and tyres
General
Specifications R Radial ply Traffic regulations determine how fast a car

The car has whole vehicle approval. This can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
means that certain combinations of wheels and 18 Rim diameter in inches
tyres are approved. For the permissible com- NOTE
103 Codes for the maximum permitted
binations, see page 385 It is the maximum permitted speed that is
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
stated in the table.
Wheel (rim) dimensions V Speed rating for maximum permitted
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
sions, for example: 7Jx16x50. 240 km/h). Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
7 Rim width in inches T 190 km/h

Load index
J Rim flange profile Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, H 210 km/h
a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
16 Rim diameter in the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini- V 240 km/h
inches mum permitted index is specified in the table, W 270 km/h
see page 385.
50 Off-set in mm (dis- Y 300 km/h
tance from wheel Speed ratings
centre to wheel con- Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
tact surface against speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS). WARNING
the hub) The car must be fitted with tyres which have
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed the same or a higher load index (LI) and
Tyre dimensions speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
rating is specified in the table, see page 385.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. with too low a load index or speed rating is
Example of designation: The only exception to these conditions is win- used, it may overheat.
ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those
235/60 R18 103 V. without), where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not
235 Tyre width (mm) be driven faster than the speed rating of the 08
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and maximum of 160 km/h).
tyre width (%)
319
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Spare wheel* foam block. The foam block contains all the NOTE
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only tools.
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
intended for use temporarily and must be belongs to the car model in question, which
Taking out the spare wheel
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- is indicated on the jack's label.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
sible. The car's handling may be altered by the
and forwards. The label also indicates the jack's maximum
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's 2. Undo the retaining screw. height.
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay 3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the 4. Lift out the spare wheel. 2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the removal tool for wheel covers* located
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If
Removing another jack is selected, see page 332.
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
Set up the warning triangle, see page 324 if a
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the wheels which will remain on the ground.
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-
tyre pressure table, see page 385. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
face.
for example.
IMPORTANT 1. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an 4. Screw together the towing eye with the
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare automatic gearbox. wheel wrench* until the stop position as
wheel on the car. illustrated below.
WARNING
IMPORTANT Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
The car must never be driven fitted with threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
more than one temporary spare wheel. is free from dirt.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

08 well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the

08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the

ground.
IMPORTANT Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as

illustrated and that the foot is positioned
The towing eye must be screwed into all vertically under the anchorage.
threads in the wheel bolt wrench. IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level. IMPORTANT
5. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench. The jack mounting point is the rearmost of
7. the two rear recesses.
WARNING
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Never position anything between the Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack wheel.
and the car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each side Installation

of the car. There is a recess in the plastic 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the and hub. 08
321
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts WARNING

thoroughly.
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot on the jack.
rotate.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car
- or preferably a crash barrier - between
them and the road.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured
tyre, switching between summer tyres and
winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to
the specific model is to be used to jack up
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
important that the wheel bolts are tight- often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check is recommended. In this instance, follow the
the torque with a torque wrench. instructions for use that come with the
5. Refit any full wheel covers. equipment.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be
positioned over the valve on the wheel rim
during fitting.
08
322
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure Fuel economy, ECO pressure

At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure is recommended (applies for both full
load and light load) in order to obtain optimum
fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure

The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold
G021830 tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature. After several
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
door pillar (between frame and rear door) pressure increases.
shows which pressures the tyres should have
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
at different loads and speed conditions. This is
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs
also specified in the tyre pressure table, see
the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
page 385.
pressure that is too low could result in the tyres
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
tyre dimension sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
• ECO pressure1 steering characteristics.
• Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare) NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
NOTE natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
Temperature differences change the 08
tyre pressure.
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
323
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-
able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
08 A case with first aid equipment is located under

the floor in the cargo area.

08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
General the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency WARNING
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12 used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
V sockets, see pages 227 and 300. Choose the authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
electrical socket that is nearest the punctured the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
tyre. is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sock- Overview
ets in the tunnel console, see page 227, no
other current consumer must be connected
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary to the other one.
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a NOTE
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The
kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing The compressor for temporary emergency
fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira- puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
tion date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
Location of the emergency puncture
tured in the tread.
repair kit
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being
NOTE Label, maximum permitted speed
sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency
The emergency puncture repair kit is only puncture repair kit is located under the floor in Switch
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the cargo area, see page 324.
the tread. Cable
08
Bottle holder (orange cap)
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in Protective cap

08 Wheels and tyres
Pressure reducing valve Sealing punctured tyres WARNING

Air hose The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
Sealing fluid bottle fluid with soap and water.
Pressure gauge
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
G014338
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
repair kit. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
speed and affix it to the steering wheel. start the car.
08

08 Wheels and tyres
NOTE IMPORTANT 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.
If the compressor is connected to one of the Risk of overheating. The compressor must
two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no not run for more than 10 minutes. • If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
other current consumer must be connected insufficiently sealed. The journey should
to the other one. not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
WARNING pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres-
(Release air with the pressure reducing sure specified in accordance with the
Do not leave children in the car without tyre pressure table, see page 385 (1
supervision when the engine is running. valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
WARNING sure is too high.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
WARNING in the tyre is too big. The journey should not WARNING
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- centre is recommended. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket. 3. Make sure the compressor is switched off.
should not be continued. Contacting an Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the
authorised tyre centre is recommended. 12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit dust cap.
the valve cap.
NOTE 13. As soon as possible, drive approximately NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
drops after approximately 30 seconds. that this replacement is performed by an
Rechecking the repair and pressure authorised Volvo workshop.
1. Reconnect the equipment.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
08

08 Wheels and tyres
WARNING WARNING Replacing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle when the expiration date
Check the tyre pressure regularly. Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run- has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- mentally hazardous waste.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- ficient ventilation.
est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace- WARNING
ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the
workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid. WARNING The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Do not leave children in the car without
WARNING supervision when the engine is running. Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been 3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an sockets and start the car. Store out of the reach of children.
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
is 200 km). The staff there can determine to position I.
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced. IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
Inflating the tyres not run for more than 10 minutes.
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
1. The compressor must be switched off.
see page 385. (Release air using the pres-
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
and locate the cable and air hose.
too high.)
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
08 hose and cable.
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Refit the dust cap.

08 Wheels and tyres
08
329
Engine compartment............................................................................. 332
Lamps................................................................................................... 339
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 345
Battery................................................................................................... 348
Fuses..................................................................................................... 353
Car care................................................................................................ 364
330
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
09 Engine compartment
General WARNING If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-

tion the jack against the front edge on the
Volvo service programme Remember that the radiator fan (located at engine's subframe.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- the front of the engine compartment, behind
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as the radiator) may start automatically some Do not damage the splashguard under the
after the engine has been switched off. engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Always have the engine cleaned by a work- tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Volvo workshop to perform the service and shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is Always use axle stands or similar.
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the hot.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
personnel, special tools and service literature
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
to guarantee the highest quality of service. Raising the car
fixed under the lifting points. See preceding
illustration.
IMPORTANT NOTE
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and Volvo recommends only using the jack that Opening and closing the bonnet
follow the instructions in the Service and belongs to the car model in question. If a
Warranty Booklet. jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for
use supplied with the equipment.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
• Coolant
• Engine oil
• Power steering fluid
• Washer fluid
332
Engine compartment 09
Engine compartment, overview Filling washer fluid

Air filter
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
G031911
tem is highly dangerous. The remote control
key must always be in 0 position when work
is being done in the engine compartment,
Pull the handle by the pedals. An informa- see page 78.
tion symbol lights when the bonnet is open,
see page 72. Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the remote control key is in II position
Move the catch to the left and open the The appearance of the engine compartment may or when the engine is hot.
bonnet. (The catch hook is located vary depending on engine variant.
between the headlamp and grille, see illus- Coolant expansion tank
tration.) Checking the engine oil
Power steering fluid reservoir
WARNING Engine oil dipstick1
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. Radiator
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
333
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. driver is informed via the warning symbol in the Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis- important before the first scheduled oil change.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
play texts. Certain models have both variants.
page 378. Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
IMPORTANT Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- are made on a cold engine before starting. The
In order to fulfil the requirements for the ance with the intervals specified in the Service measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
engine's service intervals all engines are and Warranty Booklet. diately after the engine is switched off. The
filled with a specially adapted synthetic dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
because the oil has not had time to flow down
has been made very carefully with regard to permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
into the oil sump.
service life, starting characteristics, fuel ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
consumption and environmental impact. higher grade, see page 378.
An approved engine oil must be used in For capacities,see page 379 and onwards.
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed Engine with oil dipstick2
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
G021737
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
G021734
Volvo uses different systems for warning of Measurement and filling if required
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and Dipstick and filler pipe. off the engine it is important to wait
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
334
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back Engine with electronic oil level sensor3
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps Message and graph in the display.
1 - 4. Filler pipe.4 Message
WARNING You do not need to take action with respect to Engine oil level
the engine oil level before a message is shown
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level in the display, see the illustration below. The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
should never be above MAX or below MIN level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
as this could lead to engine damage. engine is switched off,see page 198.
WARNING WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold If the message Oil service required is
due to the risk of fire. shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.

4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
335
IMPORTANT Measuring the oil level Coolant

If the oil level needs to be checked then it
In the event of the message Oil level low should be carried out in accordance with the Checking the level and topping up
Refill 0.5 Ltr, only fill with 0.5 litres.
sequence below.
1. Activate key position II, see page 78.
NOTE
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
The oil level is only detected by the system stalk switch to position Engine oil level
during driving. The system cannot directly
Wait....
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven > You will then see information displayed
about 30 km before the oil level display is about the engine oil level.
correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) When topping up the coolant, follow the
appears as shown in the illustration below. instructions on the packaging. It is important
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
damage. water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
WARNING much coolant concentrate.
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill WARNING
due to the risk of fire.
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
mended filling level is 4.
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
336
For capacities and for standards regarding IMPORTANT Brake and clutch fluid
water quality, see page 380.
• A high content of chlorine, chlorides Checking the level
Check the coolant regularly and other salts may cause corrosion in Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX the cooling system. voir. The level must be between the MIN and
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could agent as recommended by Volvo. Check the level regularly.
occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% Change the brake fluid every other year or at
water and 50% coolant. every other regular service.
• Mix the coolant with approved quality For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
tap water. In the event of any doubt see page 380. The fluid should be changed
about water quality, used ready-mixed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
ommendations.
mountains or tropical climates with high
• When changing coolant/replacing cool- humidity.
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
WARNING
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
• The engine must only be run with a well-
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-
ommends that the reason for the loss of
peratures that are too high may occur brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) Volvo workshop.
in the cylinder head.
337
Filling Power steering fluid Air conditioning system

Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluores-
cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an author-
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side. ised workshop.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover IMPORTANT
over the cold zone in the engine compartment.
Keep the area around the power steering
The round cover must be removed first before fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
the reservoir cap can be reached. cover must not be opened.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering. Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. require changing. The fluid level must be
The level must be between the MIN and between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-
MAX marks, which are located on the ties and recommended fluid grade, see
inside of the reservoir. page 380.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Do not forget to refit the cap. If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
338
Lamps 09
General WARNING
All bulbs are specified, see page 344. The fol-
The car’s electrical system must be in key
lowing list contains locations of bulbs and position 0 when replacing bulbs, see
other light sources that are specialised or page 78
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon IMPORTANT
lamps)
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
• Direction indicators, door mirrors
your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin-
• Approach lighting, door mirrors gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
• Courtesy lighting reflector and then causing damage.
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
• Glovebox lighting whole headlamp.
• General interior lighting in the roof Headlamps front Removing the headlamp
• Reading lamps 1. Set the car's electrical system in key posi-
• Side position, position lamps rear tion 0, see page 78:
• Brake light, Rear fog lamp, Reversing lamp 2. (First illustration)
• LED lights, general Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
WARNING Pull the headlamp straight forward.

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- IMPORTANT
ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
workshop is recommended. Working with nector.
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit. 3. (Second illustration)
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
339
09 Lamps
At the same time, guide out the con- switched on or the remote control key is Dipped beam, halogen
nector with your other hand. inserted into the ignition switch.
4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens. Removing the cover
5. Replace the bulb in question.
Securing the headlamp
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 339.

2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 339. 4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
1. Release the catches by pressing out.
When securing, check that the long lock pin is 5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it
engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes. 2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.
in. It can be secured in one position.
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the con-
nector correctly installed before the lighting is
340
Lamps 09
Main beam, Halogen Extra main beam, ABL headlamps* Direction indicators
1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover, see page 340 2. Remove the cover, see page 340. 2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
clockwise.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
and then pulling straight out 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight
bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. out.
4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket 5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the
and turning anticlockwise.
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It socket. It can only be secured in one posi-
can be secured in one position. tion. 5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
``

09 Lamps
Side marker lamps Rear fog lamp Location of rear bulbs
Lamp lens, right-hand side

Before starting to replace a bulb, see The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the
page 339. bumper. Position (LED)/side marker lamps
1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- Side reflector, rear
clockwise.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and Brake light
remove it. 2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning the bulb anticlockwise. Reversing lamp
3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.
It can only be installed in one way. 3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock- Indicator
wise.
4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn Brake light (LED)
clockwise. 4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
342
Lamps 09
Brake light and reversing lamp Number plate lighting Lighting, cargo area
G031942
Both the brake light and the reversing lamp 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area. that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
1. Open the panel. and withdraw it. 2. Replace the bulb.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
clockwise. back the lamp housing.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in into place.
and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
``
343
09 Lamps
Vanity mirror lighting Specification, bulbs Lighting WA Type

Removal of lamp lens Lighting WA Type
Number plate 5 C5W LL
Dipped beam, 55 H7 LL lighting
halogen
Brake light 21 P21W LL
Main beam, 65 H9
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Halogen
Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL
Extra main 65 H9
beam, ABL A Watt
Front direction 21 PY21W LL

indicators
Side marker 3 W3WLL

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens lamps front
and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
Direction indi- 5 WY5W LL
edge.
cators side,
2. Snap off the lamp lens. door mirrors
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb Courtesy light- 3 T10 Socket
straight out to the side and replace with a ing front W2.1x9.5d
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the
pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then Glovebox light- 5 Socket SV8.5
be crushed. ing Length 43 mm
Attaching the lamp lens Vanity mirror 2 T5 Socket

1. Refit the lamp lens. lighting W2x4.6d
2. Press it into place. Cargo area 10 Socket SV8.5
lighting Length 43 mm
344
Wiper blades and washer fluid 09
Wiper blades trical system to key position I. (For detailed NOTE

information on key positions, see page 78.)
Service position Once the wiper arms have been in service
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE position, the wipers must be activated and
button again to set the car’s electrical sys- deactivated before service position can be
tem in key position 0. used again.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for Replacing the wiper blades
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-
Wiper blades in service position. tem to key position I (or when the car is
started).
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
IMPORTANT
example) they must be in service position.
If the wiper arms in service position have
IMPORTANT been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
Before placing the wiper blades in the serv- screen before the wipers are allowed to
ice position, make sure that they are not fro- return to their starting position. This is to
zen down. avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

switch1 and briefly press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's elec-
1 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
345
09 Wiper blades and washer fluid
1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
G021763
5. Lower the wiper arm.
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out Cleaning
parallel with the wiper arm. For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
NOTE page 364 and onwards.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard. The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the IMPORTANT
Check that the blade is firmly installed. blade on the passenger side.
Check the wiper blades regularly.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window ice life of the wiper blades.
screen.
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
G032770
346
Wiper blades and washer fluid 09
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser-
voir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 380.
347
09 Battery
Operation NOTE IMPORTANT

The service life and function of the battery is
The life of the battery is shortened if it If the following instruction is not observed
influenced by factors such as the number of becomes discharged repeatedly. then the energy saving function for infotain-
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/
ditions, climatic conditions etc. The life of the battery is affected by several
or the message in the information display
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
about the main battery's state of charge
• Never disconnect the battery when the mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
engine is running. gradually with time and therefore needs to
the connection of an external battery or bat-
be recharged if the car is not used for a
• Check that the cables to the battery are longer time or when it is only driven short
tery charger:
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
distances. Extreme cold further limits star- • The negative battery terminal on the
ting capacity. car's main battery must never be used
To maintain the battery in good condition, at for connecting an external battery or
WARNING least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- battery charger - only the car chassis
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen mended or that the battery is connected to may be used as the grounding point.
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark a battery charger with automatic trickle See the section "Start assistance" - for a
can be formed if a jump lead is con- charging. description of how the cable clamps must
nected incorrectly, and this can be A battery that is kept fully charged has a be attached.
enough for the battery to explode. maximum service life.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns. IMPORTANT
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact
Never use a quick charger to charge the
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
battery.
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
348
Battery 09
Symbols on the battery Avoid sparks and naked Replacing the main battery
Use protective goggles. flames.
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes
before any electrical connections are touched
- this is because the car's electrical system
Risk of explosion. needs to store the necessary information to
Further information in the control modules.
owner's manual.
Must be taken for recy-

Store the battery out of cling.
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-

NOTE
rosive acid. An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
349
09 Battery
Release the rubber moulding so that the Fitting

rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg-
ative cables in the correct order.
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

Detach the black negative cable. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
Detach the red positive cable.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery. 4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
Loosen the screw holding the battery both battery and outlet in the body.
clamp.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal.)
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See Removal.)
9. Align the front cover and secure it with the
clips. (See removal.)
For more information on the car's main battery
Open the clips on the front cover and - see page 386.
remove the cover.
350
Battery 09
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe* IMPORTANT Location of the batteries

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
When replacing batteries in cars with the
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful Start/Stop function, the AGM1 type batter-
battery for starting and one support battery ies must be fitted.
that helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe
function's starting sequence.
NOTE
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 126. • The higher the current take-off in the car
(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more
For more information on the car's main battery the batteries must be charged =
- see page 119 and 386. increased fuel consumption.
Battery Start Support • When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1.
Cold start then the Start/Stop function is disen- Battery for starting3 2. Support battery.
capacityA, 760 120 gaged.
CCA (A) The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
SizeB, starting. A workshop should be contacted in
278×175× to high current take-off means:
L×W×H 150×90×106 the event of questions or problems - an author-
190
(mm) • The engine starts automatically2 without ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
Capacity (manual gearbox).
70 8
(Ah)
• The engine starts automatically without the
A In accordance with the SAE standard. driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
B Largest possible size. pedal (automatic gearbox).
1 Absorbed Glass Mat

2 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
3 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 349.

09 Battery
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed If the battery has become so discharged
then the Start/Stop function may temporar- that everything is "black" and in principle
ily cease to work after the connection of an the car does not have all the normal electri-
external battery or battery charger: cal functions and the engine is subsequently
started using an external battery or battery
• The negative battery terminal on the charger, then the Start/Stop function will be
car's main battery must never be used activated. It will then be possible for the
for connecting an external battery or engine to be auto-stopped but in the event
battery charger - only the car chassis of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may
may be used as the grounding point. fail to auto-start the engine due to inade-
See the section "Start assistance" - for a quate capacity in the battery.
description of how the cable clamps must The battery must first be charged in order to
be attached. ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-
stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C
the battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a
charging time of 3-4 hours is recom-
mended. The recommendation is that the
battery is charged using an external battery
charger.
If this is not possible then the recommen-
dation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
352
Fuses 09
General Location, fuse boxes

All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-
tect the car's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
to see whether the curved wire has blown. electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage. Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an Under the glovebox
amperage higher than that specified when Cargo area
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/
possibly lead to fire. Stop*)
353
09 Fuses
Engine compartment
354
Fuses 09
General fuses, engine compartment Function A Function A

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 Parking heater* 25
and fitting of fuses. tronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the gloveboxA Ventilation fanA 40
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 - -
tronic module (CEM) with fuse
Engine compartment, front box B under the glovebox ABS pump 40
Engine compartment, lower
Primary fuse for central electri- 60 ABS valves 20
These fuses are all located in the engine com- cal unit in cargo areaA
partment box. The fuses in (C) are located - -
Primary fuse for central electri- 60
under (A).
cal unit in passenger compart- Headlamp levelling*; Active 10
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows ment with fuse box A under the Xenon headlamps - ABL*
the location of the fuses. gloveboxA
Primary fuse for the central elec- 20
• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse" Primary fuse for central electri- 60 tronic module (CEM) with fuse
type and must only be replaced by a work-
cal unit in passenger compart- box B under the glovebox
shop1.
ment with fuse box A under the
• Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type gloveboxA ABS 5
and should be replaced by a workshop1.
- - Speed related power steering* 5
• Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
PTC element, air preheater*A 100 Engine control module; Trans- 10
mission control module; Air-
Headlamp washers* 20 bags
Windscreen wipers 30 Heated washer nozzles* 10

``

09 Fuses
Function A Function A Function A

- - Relay coil in relay for solenoid 5 Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.); 10
clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel); Valves, Engine control module
Headlamp control 5 Relay coil in relay for coolant (6-cyl.) Solenoids (6-cyl. without
pump (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop); turbo); Actuator motors, intake
- - Relay coils in central electrical manifold (6-cyl. without turbo);
unit in engine compartment cold Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl. 2.0
- - zone (Start/Stop) l petrol, 5-cyl. petrol); Oil level
sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
- - Start relayA 30
Lambda-sonds (4-cyl. petrol); 10
Internal relay coils 5 Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol); 10 Lambda-sond (diesel); Control
Glow control module (5-cyl. die- module, radiator roller cover
Auxiliary lamps* 20 sel) (manual 5-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)
Horn 15 Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol); 20 EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol); 15
Capacitor (6-cyl.) Lambda-sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)
Relay coil in main relay for 10
engine management system; Engine control module (petrol) 10
Engine control module (5, 6-cyl. Diesel filter heater 20
Engine control module (diesel) 15
petrol) Control module, radiator roller 5
Transmission control module 15 cover (5-cyl. petrol)
Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. die- 15
sel, 6-cyl.); Control valves (5- Crankcase ventilation heater (5- 10
Solenoid clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. 15 cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6-cyl. cyl. diesel); Oil pump automatic
diesel); Coolant pump (5-cyl. petrol); Engine control module gearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/
diesel Start/Stop) (5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.) Stop)
Glow plugs (diesel) 70

Fuses 09
Function A
Cooling fan (4-cyl., 5-cyl. petrol) 60
Cooling fan (6-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel) 80
Electro-hydraulic power steer- 100

ing
A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is
empty - see instead page 362.
357
09 Fuses
Under the glovebox
Positions Box A Function A Box A Function A

On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses in fuse box A. - - Control panel, rear passen- 20
ger door, right
Box A Function A - -
Control panel, rear passen- 20
Primary fuse for audio con- 40 - - ger door, left
trol module*; Primary fuse Keyless* 20
for fuses 16-20: Infotain- 12 V socket, cargo area* 15
ment Power seat driver's side* 20
Control panel, driver's door 20
- -
Control panel, front passen- 20 Power seat passenger side* 20
- - ger door

Fuses 09
Box A Function A Box A Function A Box B Function A

- - Seat heating (driver's side) 15 Steering wheel module 7.5
Infotainment control module 5 Parking assistance*; Park- 5 Central locking system, fuel 10
ing camera*; Towbar control filler flap
Audio control unit (ampli- 10 module *
fier)* Rear window washer 15
AWD control module* 15
Digital radio*; TV* Windscreen washers 15
Active chassis Four-C* 10
Audio 15
Unlocking, tailgate 10
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5
Box B Function A Folding head restraint* 10
Rear Seat Entertainment 7.5 Rear window wiper 15 Fuel pump 20
(RSE)*
- - Movement detector alarm*; 5
Sunroof*; Interior lighting 5
roof; Climate sensor*; Climate panel
Interior lighting; Driver's 7.5
Damper motors, air intake door control panel, power Steering lock 15
12 V socket, tunnel console 15 windows; Power seats,
front*; Remote controlled Siren alarm*; Data link con- 5
Seat heating, rear right* 15 garage door opener* nector OBDII
Information display (DIM) 5 - -

Seat heating, rear left* 15
Adaptive cruise control, 10 Airbags 10
Power lumbar support* 15
ACC*; collision warning sys-
tem* Collision warning system* 5
Seat heating (passenger 15
side) Interior lighting; Rain sensor 7.5
``

09 Fuses
Box B Function A
Accelerator pedal sensor, 7.5
PTC element air preheater*;
Dimming, interior rearview
mirror*; Seat heating, rear*
- -
Brake light 5
Sunroof* 20
Immobiliser 5

Fuses 09
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions Function A Function A

Function A
Power operated tailgate* 20 - -
Electric parking brake, left 30
- - - -
Electric parking brake, right 30
- - Trailer socket 1* 40
Rear window defroster 30
- - - -
Trailer socket 2* 15
``

09 Fuses
Engine compartment, cold zone - Start/Stop*
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

• Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" Positions Function A
type and must only be replaced by a work-
shop2.
Function A
Main fuse for central electronic 175
• Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and Main fuse for central electrical 175 module (CEM) with fuse box B
must only be replaced by a workshop2. unit in the engine compartment under the glovebox, central
electrical unit in passenger
• Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type. compartment with fuse box A
For more information on Start/Stop - see under the glovebox, central
page 126. electrical unit in cargo area
PTC element, air preheater* 100

Fuses 09
Function A Function A
Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 Support battery 70
tronic module (CEM) with fuse
box B under the glovebox Central electronic module 15
(CEM) - reference voltage sup-
Primary fuse for central electri- 60 port battery; Charging point
cal unit in passenger compart- support battery
glovebox

cal unit in passenger compart-
glovebox

cal unit in cargo area
Ventilation fan 40
- -
- -
Start relay 30
Internal diode 50
363
09 Car care
Washing the car WARNING For cleaning:

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. – Set the wiper blades in service position,
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is see page 345.
Use car shampoo. hot.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork NOTE
as soon as possible. Bird droppings con-
IMPORTANT Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
tain chemicals that affect and discolour ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
paintwork very quickly. An authorised Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- shampoo.
Volvo workshop is recommended for the ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
removal of any discoloration. example. Do not use any strong solvents.
• Hose down the underbody. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching sponge Automatic car washes
• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has instead. An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
been removed in order to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
directly onto the locks. everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
NOTE
mended for achieving optimum results.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
must not then be warmed up by the sun! condensation on the inside of the lens. This
NOTE
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to During the first few months a new car must
plenty of lukewarm water. withstand this. Condensation is normally only be handwashed. This is because the
vented out of the lamp housing when the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm lamp has been switched on for a time.
soap solution or car shampoo.
High-pressure washing
• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty Cleaning the wiper blades When using high-pressure washing, use
surfaces.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, sweeping movements and make sure that the
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing water impair the service life of wiper blades. surface of the car (the distance applies to all
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the
risk of water stains that may need to be
locks.
polished away is reduced.
364
Car care 09
Testing the brakes IMPORTANT More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
WARNING rubber. Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
Always test the brakes after washing the uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
car, including the parking brake, to ensure ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
that moisture and corrosion do not attack essary. Use a soft washing sponge. tain both polish and wax.
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer. IMPORTANT
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must Only paint treatment recommended by
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
not be used.
when driving long distances in rain or slush. as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
The heat from the friction causes the brake lin- sealing or similar could damage the paint-
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing Rims work. Paintwork damage caused by such
after starting in very damp or cold weather. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by treatments is not covered by Volvo war-
Volvo. ranty.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
components
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated Water-repellent coating*
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
aluminium rims. Never use products such as car wax,
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
components, such as glossy trim mouldings. Polishing and waxing ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull properties.
tions must be followed carefully. or to give the paintwork extra protection. Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
The car does not need to be polished until it is the glass surface.
at least one year old. However, the car can be To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
the car in direct sunlight.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you coating.
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-
able from Volvo dealers is recommended in

09 Car care
order to maintain the water-repellent proper- Cleaning the interior Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
ties. This should be used first after three years Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- upholstery
and then each year. ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
and follow the instructions included with the authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
Rustproofing – inspection and car care product. avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
maintenance the upholstery.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
The car received a thorough and complete agents.
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body IMPORTANT
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The Carpets and cargo area Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of fabric upholstery.
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
exposed members, cavities, closed sections Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and side doors.
– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and and is treated to preserve its original appear-
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does lift the mat straight up. ance.
not require treatment for approximately 12
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-
years. After this period, it should be treated at
each pin. tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that
processed so that it retains its natural charac-
you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for
teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
assistance if the car needs further treatment. WARNING
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is Before setting off check that the inlaid mat both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- in the driver area is firmly affixed and offers a comprehensive product for the clean-
proofing needs to be checked regularly and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
touched-up if necessary in order for it to be when used in accordance with the instructions,
maintained. preserves the leather's protective coating.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for After a period of use the natural appearance of
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
mats should be cleaned with agents recom- ing more or less on the surface texture of the
mended by your Volvo dealer! leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
366
Car care 09
To achieve best results Volvo recommends Protective treatment of leather Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
cleaning and the application of protective upholstery 1. Same procedure as group 1.
cream once to four times per year (or more if 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- cream on the felted cloth and massage in 2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
able from your Volvo dealer. a thin layer of cream with gentle circular Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
movements on the leather.
IMPORTANT 1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
2. Same procedure as group 1.
• Certain items of coloured clothing (for before use.
example, jeans and suede garments) Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
The leather has now been given improved pro-
may stain the upholstery.
tection against stains and improved UV pro- and wood parts
• Never use strong solvents. Such prod- tection. A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and moistened with water, available from Volvo
leather upholstery. Washing instructions for the leather
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
steering wheel
parts and surfaces.
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-
Washing instructions for leather tened sponge and neutral soap. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
upholstery stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plas- able from Volvo dealers can be used for more
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam. tic. difficult cleaning.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular • Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
movements.
Cleaning seatbelts
agents are recommended for best results. Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the If the steering wheel has stains: textile cleaning agent is available from your
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
stain. Do not rub. before allowing it to retract.
blood)
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
allow the leather to dry completely.
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
367
09 Car care
Touching up minor paintwork damage Colour code (Paint code) Repairing minor paint damage such as
Paint is an important part of the car's rust- stone chips and scratches
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Materials
• primer1 - for e.g. plastic-clad bumpers
there are special adhesive primers availa-
G021832
ble in spray cans
• base coat and clear coat - are available in Code for car's colour
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
It is important that the correct colour is used. Before work is started, the car must be clean
• masking tape For product decal location, see page 372. and dry as well as at a temperature above
• fine sand paper1. 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use
a primer. In the event of damage to a plas-
tic surface, an adhesive primer should be
used for better results - spray into the
spray can's cap and brush thinly.
1 If required.
2 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
368
Car care 09
2. A light sanding with very fine abrasive

material can be performed locally before
painting if necessary (e.g. if there are rough
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
369
Type designations................................................................................. 372
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 374
Engine specifications............................................................................ 377
Engine oil............................................................................................... 378
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 380
Fuel....................................................................................................... 382
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 385
Electrical system................................................................................... 386
Type approval....................................................................................... 387
Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 399
370
SPECIFICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
Label location
10
372
10 Specifications
Type designations
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle NOTE

identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer The labels shown in the owner's manual are 10
regarding the car and when ordering spare not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
parts and accessories. their approximate appearance and location
Type designation, vehicle identification in the car. The information that applies to
number, maximum permissible weights, your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
6-cyl.
4-cyl / 5-cyl
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
373
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
10
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
A Wheelbase 2774 H Rear track 1586 90% full and all fluids.
B Length 4627 I Load width, floor 1090 The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
C Load length, floor, folded rear J Width 1891 table page 375) influences the payload and is
seat 1789 not included in the kerb weight.
K Width including door mirrors 2120
D Load length, floor 972 Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
L Width including folded-in door Kerb weight.
E Height 1713 mirrors 1891
F Load height 802
G Front track 1632
374
10 Specifications
NOTE Towing capacity and towball load

The documented kerb weight applies to 10
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- NOTE
out extra equipment or accessories. This The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
means that for every accessory added the bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- than 1800 kg.
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, For information on decal location, see page 372.
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car. Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
WARNING Equipment level
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and Max. load: See registration document.
how the load is distributed.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
All All All 0–1200 50
T5 B4204T7 Automatic, MPS6 1800 90
375
10 Specifications
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
10
3.2 AWD B6324S5 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
T6 AWD B6304T4 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D3 D5204T7 Manual, M66 1600 75
D3 D5204T7 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D4 D5204T3 Manual, M66 1600 75
D4 D5204T3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D4 AWD D5244T17 Manual, M66 1800 90
D4 AWD D5244T17 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D4 AWDB D5204T3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D5 AWD D5244T11 Manual, M66 1800 90
D5 AWD D5244T15 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 372.
B Only certain markets.
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50
376
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
10
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine Output Output Torque (Nm/ No. of Bore Stroke Swept Com-
codeA (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) rpm) cylin- (mm) (mm) volume pression
ders (litres) ratio
T5 B4204T7 177/5500 240/5500 320/1800-5000 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1
T6 AWD B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/2100–4200 6 82.0 93.2 2.953 9.3:1
3.2 AWD B6324S5 179/6400 243/6400 320/3200 6 84 96 3.192 10.8:1
D3 D5204T7 100/3500 136/3500 350/1500-2250 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4
D5204T3 120/3500 163/3500 400/1500-2750 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 AWDB
D4 AWD D5244T17 120/4000 163/4000 420/1500–2500 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1
D5 AWD D5244T11C 158/4000 215/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1
D5 AWD D5244T15D 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

C Manual gearbox
D Automatic gearbox
377
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse IMPORTANT
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- driving conditions. It provides extra protection
10 for the engine. In order to fulfil the requirements for the
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. engine's service intervals all engines are
Below are some examples of adverse driving Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. filled with a specially adapted synthetic
conditions. engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
Check the oil level more frequently for long
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
journeys: consumption and environmental impact.
• towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in
• in mountainous regions order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
• at high speeds grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot- otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
ter than +40 °C starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
tances at low temperatures. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
378
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade

10
Engine Engine codeA Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T6 AWD B6304T4 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx 6.8
3.2 AWD B6324S5 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx 6.8
D4
D5204T3 approx. 5.9
D4 AWDB
D3 D5204T7 approx. 5.9
D4 AWD D5244T17 approx. 5.9
D5 AWD D5244T11C approx. 5.9
D5 AWD D5244T15D approx. 5.9
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

T5 B4204T7 Viscosity: SAE 5W–30 approx. 5.4
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
C Manual gearbox.
D Automatic gearbox.
For filling engine oil, see page 333.
379
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Coolant EngineA Volume

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
10 (litres)
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the pack-
aging. 3.2 AWD B6324S5 8.9
T6 AWD B6304T4
D4 D5204T3
D3 D5204T7
D4 AWD D5244T17
D5 AWD D5244T15
D5 AWD D5244T11
T5 B4204T7 10.5
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on
the engine, see page 372.
Other fluids and lubricants

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
380
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341 10
TF-80SC 7.0 AW1
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering fluid Power steering - WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during
cold weather and below freezing point.
Cars without headlamp washing 4.5
Fuel Petrol engine approx. 70 Petrol: see page 296
Diesel engine approx. 70 Diesel: see page 297
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear-
box oil does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, this may be nec-
essary under adverse driving conditions,
see page 380.
381
10 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

10
T5 262 11.3 161 6.9 198 8.5
T6 AWD 354 15.2 188 8.1 249 10.7
3.2 AWD 322 13.8 176 7.6 229 9.9
D3 182 6.9 129 4.9 149 5.7
D3 229 8.7 148 5.6 178 6.8
D4 182 6.9 129 4.9 149 5.7
D4 229 8.7 148 5.6 178 6.8
D4 AWD 172 6.5 135 5.1 149 5.7
D4 AWD 233 8.9 148 5.6 179 6.8
382
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
D5 AWD 172 6.5 135 5.1 149 5.7
D5 AWD 233 8.9 148 5.6 179 6.8
Explanation NOTE There are several reasons for increased fuel

consumption compared with the table's val-
gram/km If the consumption and emission data is ues. Examples of this are:
missing then it is included in the enclosed
litre/100 km supplement. • The driver's driving style.
• If the customer has specified wheels larger
Fuel consumption and emissions of than those fitted as standard on the mod-
Urban driving el's basic version, then resistance increa-
carbon dioxide
ses.
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
Extra-urban driving • High speed results in increased wind resis-
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic tance.
Combined driving version and without extra equipment. The car's • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weight may increase depending on equipment. weather and the condition of the car.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, Even a combination of the above-mentioned
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- examples can result in significantly improved
ide emissions.
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine
and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
383
10 Specifications
Fuel
consumption. For further information, please

refer to the regulations referred to1.
10
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-
eration as well as braking too hard.
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 385.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 12 and 292.
See page 296 for general information on fuel.
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine
and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation.
CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
384
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved tyre pressures

10
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
(km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
235/65 R 17 0 - 160 240 240 270 270 270
235/60 R 18
All engines
235/55 R 19 160 + 240 240 270 270 -
255/45 R 20
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving.
B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
385
10 Specifications
Electrical system
Electrical system The battery capacity is dependent upon the IMPORTANT

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. equipment level in the vehicle.
10 If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
The electrical system is single-pole and uses battery of the same cold start capacity and
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Battery
Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity, Reserve capacity
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A) (minutes)
Petrol (Ethanol) 12 520–800 100–160
Diesel 12 700–800 135–160
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12 760A 135

A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
NOTE
• The battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's
dimensions.
• The battery's height is different depend-
ing on size.
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*

For information on batteries in cars with
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 351.

10 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system Country Radar system

Lock system, standard China
Country 10
Country Singapore
EU, China
IDA: Infocomm Development

Authority of Singapore.
Hong Kong
Brazil
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country
EU
Korea
``
387
10 Specifications
Type approval
Bluetooth
10 Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
388
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Czech Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
Republic: ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
``
389
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10 Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ Bluetooth Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ
ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
France: Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania: Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Nether- Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
lands: relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal-ĘtiĒijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oĘrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
390
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och
övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
``
391
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10 China: ㄀कϝᴵǂ䖯ষ੠⫳ѻॖଚ೼݊ѻકⱘ䇈ᯢк៪Փ⫼᠟‫ݠ‬Ёˈᑨߞॄϟ䗄᳝݇‫ݙ‬ᆍ˖
ᷛᯢ䰘ӊЁ᠔㾘ᅮⱘᡔᴃᣛᷛ੠Փ⫼㣗ೈˈ䇈ᯢ᠔᳝᥻ࠊǃ䇗ᭈঞᓔ݇ㄝՓ⫼ᮍ⊩˗
ƵՓ⫼乥⥛˖*+]
Ƶㄝᬜܼ৥䕤ᇘࡳ⥛ (,53 ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨P:៪싨G%Pǂķ
Ƶ᳔໻ࡳ⥛䈅ᆚᑺ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨G%P0+] (,53 ķ
Ƶ䕑乥ᆍ䰤˖SSP
Ƶᴖᬷথᇘ 䕤ᇘ ࡳ⥛ ᇍᑨ䕑⊶f ‫ֵס‬䘧ᏺᆑҹ໪ ˖
• 싨G%PN+] 0+]
• 싨G%PN+] *+]
• 싨G%P0+] *+]
• 싨G%P0+] *+]
• 싨G%P0+] ݊ᅗ *+]
ϡᕫ᪙㞾᳈ᬍথᇘ乥⥛ǃࡴ໻থᇘࡳ⥛ ࣙᣀ乱໪ࡴ㺙ᇘ乥ࡳ⥛ᬒ໻఼ ˈϡᕫ᪙㞾໪᥹໽㒓៪ᬍ⫼݊ᅗথᇘ໽㒓˗
Փ⫼ᯊϡᕫᇍ৘⾡ড়⊩ⱘ᮴㒓⬉䗮ֵϮࡵѻ⫳᳝ᆇᑆᡄ˗ϔᮺথ⦄᳝ᑆᡄ⦄䈵ᯊˈᑨゟे‫ذ‬ℶՓ⫼ˈᑊ䞛প᥾ᮑ⍜䰸ᑆᡄৢᮍৃ㒻㓁
Փ⫼˗
Փ⫼ᖂࡳ⥛᮴㒓⬉䆒໛ˈᖙ乏ᖡফ৘⾡᮴㒓⬉Ϯࡵⱘᑆᡄ៪ᎹϮǃ⾥ᄺঞए⭫ᑨ⫼䆒໛ⱘ䕤ᇘᑆᡄ˗
ϡᕫ೼亲ᴎ੠ᴎഎ䰘䖥Փ⫼Ǆ
392
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Taiwan: ‫܅‬㧤෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻䏺ऄรԼ㦕 10
รԼԲය
ᆖী‫ڤ‬ᎁᢞ‫ٽ‬௑հ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺‫ױ‬Δֆ‫׹‬Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌ‫݁ृش‬լ൓ᖐ۞!᧢‫ޓ‬᙮෷Ε‫ף‬Օ‫פ‬෷ࢨ᧢‫଺ޓ‬๻ૠհ௽ࢤ֗‫פ‬౨Ζ
รԼ؄ය
‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌ‫ش‬լ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰‫ڜ‬٤֗եឫ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼‫ڶ‬եឫ෼ွழΔ!ᚨ‫ܛم‬ೖ‫ش‬Δࠀ‫ޏ‬࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉᥛࠌ‫ش‬Ζছႈ
‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾऄ๵ࡳ!‫܂‬ᄐհྤᒵሽຏॾΖ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊ‫ٽ࠹ݴ‬ऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭‫ش‬ሽं!ᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖ
CCAB10LP0230T7
``
393
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10 South ⭧㟓#⭠‿
Korea:
Volvo Car Korea
㐔㷡㣄G䂈☐aGuY\TphtYXWX}
㥐䖼G⮹aGiGhGuGy
⯜⒬G⮹aGphtYUX
㇤G⇔㬐aGtVYWXW
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
ါཨ#⭠‿
Volvo Car Korea
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜䂈⫠㙸
㉐㟬㐐G㟝㇤ẠG䚐⇜ Y ┍G^Y]TX^ZG⸰⸨⾀♝G[ 㽩
⸰⸨㣄┍㵜GḔᵑ㉰䉤GX\__TX^^^
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
⏷⧴⫛#ⱇ⪣⏷㢸
୔␭䚨Gⱨ㉔㉘⽸⏈G㤸䑀䝰㐔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㡰⳴⦐G㢬⮹㙼㤸ḰGḴ⥜═G㉐⽸㏘⏈G䚔G㍌G㛺㏩⏼␘
394
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Singa- 10
pore:
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
Jordan: The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number.
BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.
BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU
``
395
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10 South
Africa:
Uruguay: This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A,
BVLV905A)]
396
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1 10
Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Nigeria:
Mexico: Warning
"Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma
clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."
Bluetooth module installation information
This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC-
TRONICS, INC. When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since
"IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not
visible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-
IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections
15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.
COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353
``
397
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10 Bot-
swana:
Croatia:
398
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
General Symbols in the display Indicator and information symbols in the

There are a variety of different symbols in the combined instrument panel
Indicator and warning symbols in the 10
display in the car. The symbols are divided into Symbol Meaning Page
warning, indicator and information symbols. combined instrument panel
Shown below are the most common symbols Symbol Meaning Page Fault in the 72, 90
with their meanings and a reference to where ABL system*
in the manual further information can be found. Low oil pres- 74
For more information on symbols and text sure Emissions sys- 72
messages, see pages 72, 74 and 198. tem
Parking 74, 137, 139
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when brake Fault in the 72, 134
a fault has been indicated which could affect ABS system
Airbags - 19, 74
the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the SRS Rear fog lamp 72, 91
same time an explanatory text is displayed in on
the information display. Seatbelt 16, 74
reminder Stability sys- 72, 135, 147,
- Yellow information symbol, illuminates tem, DSTC, Hill 310
in combination with text in the information dis- Alternator 74 descent con-
play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys- not charging trol, Trailer sta-
tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor- bility assist
mation can also illuminate in combination with Fault in the 74, 134
other symbols. brake system Stability sys- 72, 147
Warning, 19, 31, 74, 75, tem, sport
safety mode 124 mode
Engine pre- 72
heater (diesel)
Low level in 72, 219

fuel tank
``

10 Specifications
Symbol Meaning Page Symbol Meaning Page Symbol Meaning Page

10 Information, 72 Adaptive cruise 160, 164 Start/Stop*, Adap- 130, 160
read display control*, Distance tive cruise control*
text Warning* (Distance
Alert) - - -
Main beam on 72, 90
Adaptive cruise 160, 164 Camera sensor*, 168,
control*, Distance Laser sensor* 176,
Left-hand 72 180, 183
direction indi- Warning* (Distance
cators Alert)
Auto Brake*, Dis- 164,
Adaptive cruise 160 tance Warning* 168, 176
Right-hand 72
control* (Distance Alert), City
direction indi-
SafetyTM, Collision
cators
warning system*
DRIVe - Start/ 72, 130 Adaptive cruise 155, 162
control*, Distance Fuel-driven engine 219
Stop*
Warning* (Distance block heater and
G025102
Not used - Alert) passenger com-
partment heater*
Adaptive cruise 155, 162
Other information symbols in the control*, Distance ABL system* 90
combined instrument panel Warning* (Distance
Alert)
Symbol Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise 154 Fuel filler flap, right- 295
Adaptive cruise 150, hand side
control*
control* 154, 160
Low battery 219
Adaptive cruise 160
control* Radar sensor* 160,
164, 176 Parking brake 139

10 Specifications
Symbol Meaning Page Information symbols in the roof console

display
Rain sensor* 98 10
Symbol Meaning Page
Driver Alert System* 180 Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passenger 22, 23

seat, activated
Driver Alert Sys- 180, 183
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning* Airbag, passenger 23
seat, deactivated
Driver Alert Sys- 183
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning*
Driver Alert Sys- 180

tem*, Time for a
break

11 Alphabetical Index
A Air conditioning system Audio system........................................... 232

repair................................................... 338 functions............................................. 239
A/V-AUX input.......................................... 282 Air distribution.................................. 209, 217 overview.............................................. 233
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 152 Air quality system IAQS .......................... 215 Audio volume .......................................... 233
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 90 phone.................................................. 265
Air vents................................................... 210
11 phone/media player............................ 265
Active chassis – FOUR-C........................ 224 Alarm.......................................................... 63 ring signal, phone............................... 265
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 90 alarm indicator...................................... 63 speed/noise compensation................ 239
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 224 alarm signals......................................... 64
Auto
arming................................................... 63
Adaptive cruise control............................ 152 climate control settings...................... 214
checking the alarm............................... 49
fault tracing......................................... 159 Automatic car washes............................. 364
deactivate............................................. 63
radar sensor........................................ 158
deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 64 Automatic gearbox.................................. 121
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 221 reduced alarm level.............................. 64 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 122
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 94 Alcolock................................................... 110 towing and recovery........................... 311
halogen headlamp................................ 95 trailer................................................... 306
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 209
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 85 Automatic locking...................................... 57
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 132
Airbag Automatic relocking................................... 56
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 132
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22 Auxiliary heater........................................ 221
driver's and front passenger side......... 20 Approach light, duration...................... 48, 94
AUX input......................................... 233, 255
key switch off........................................ 22 Audio
headphones socket............................ 237 AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 132
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
rear control panel................................ 237
Airbag system ........................................... 19
settings............................................... 239
Air conditioning........................................ 215 surround..................................... 232, 239
general................................................ 208
audio system .......................................... 233
Air conditioning, AC................................. 215
402
B Brakes...................................................... 133 safety grille.......................................... 303

anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 133 safety net............................................ 302
Backrest..................................................... 80 brake light............................................. 91 Cargo cover............................................. 304
front seat, lowering............................... 80 brake system...................................... 133
Car upholstery......................................... 366
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 83 electric parking brake......................... 137
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 133 Car wash.................................................. 364
Bag holder .............................................. 300 11
emergency brake lights........................ 91 Catalytic converter................................... 296
Battery............................................. 348, 386 filling brake fluid.................................. 338 recovery.............................................. 312
headphones........................................ 282 handbrake........................................... 137 CD ........................................................... 251
maintenance....................................... 348 symbols in the combined instrument
remote control ................................... 279 Centre console........................................ 200
panel................................................... 134
remote control key/PCC....................... 51 Chassis settings...................................... 224
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 339
start assistance................................... 119 Checking and topping up the coolant..... 336
symbols on the battery....................... 349
Checking the engine oil level................... 333
warning symbols................................. 349
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 191
C Children..................................................... 32
child safety locks.................................. 40
BLIS......................................................... 191 Calls child seats and side airbags................. 24
Bluetooth incoming............................................. 263 location in the car................................. 32
handsfree ........................................... 261 operation............................................. 263 safety.................................................... 32
media ................................................. 258 Camera sensor................................ 166, 175 Child safety locks...................................... 62
microphone off .................................. 264 Car care................................................... 364 Child seat................................................... 32
streaming audio ................................. 258
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 366 Child seats................................................. 32
transfer call to mobile ........................ 264
Cargo area integrated two-stage booster cushion. 38
Bonnet, opening...................................... 332
cargo cover......................................... 304 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 40
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 337 lighting.................................................. 93 recommended...................................... 33
Brake light.................................................. 91 loading................................................ 299
mounting points.................................. 300
403
size classes for child seats with the ISO- Comfort inside the passenger compart- Deadlocks.................................................. 60
FIX fixture system................................. 40 ment......................................................... 225 Defroster.................................................. 215
upper mounting points for child seats.. 43 Compass................................................. 106 Diesel....................................................... 297
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 226 calibration........................................... 106
Diesel particle filter.................................. 298
City Safety™............................................ 165 Condensation in headlamps.................... 364
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 335
11
Cleaning controls
Direction indicators.................................... 92
automatic car washes......................... 364 centre console ................................... 233
car wash............................................. 364 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 123
Controls
rims..................................................... 365 centre console.................................... 200 Display lighting.......................................... 86
seatbelts............................................. 367 Distance Warning.................................... 162
Controls, lights........................................... 86
upholstery........................................... 366
Control symbols......................................... 72 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 232
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 209
Cooling system........................................ 292 Door mirrors............................................. 103
Climate control........................................ 208
Crash, see Collision................................... 31 Driver Alert Control.................................. 179
general................................................ 208
sensors............................................... 208 Cruise control.......................................... 150 Driver Alert System.................................. 178
Clock, setting............................................. 75 Curtain Driving...................................................... 292
panorama roof.................................... 107 cooling system.................................... 292
CO2 emissions ........................................ 382
with the tailgate open......................... 293
Collision..................................................... 31 CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 209
with trailer........................................... 305
Collision warning............................. 170, 171 Driving in water........................................ 292
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 158, 165, 170
D Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 374
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 170 DAB Radio............................................... 248 towing capacity.................................. 374
Colour code, paint................................... 368 Deadlock DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 147
Combined instrument panel.............. 71, 198 deactivation.......................................... 60 DVD ......................................................... 251
temporary deactivation......................... 60
404
E Engine compartment F
coolant................................................ 336
ECC, electronic climate control............... 211 oil........................................................ 333 Fan........................................................... 213
Economical driving.................................. 292 overview.............................................. 333 Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 167, 175
power steering fluid............................ 338
ECO pressure.......................................... 323 First aid equipment.................................. 324
Engine drag control ................................ 146 11
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 126 First aid kit .............................................. 324
Engine oil......................................... 333, 378
Electrical socket...................................... 227 Fluids, capacities..................................... 380
adverse driving conditions.................. 378
cargo area........................................... 300 Fluids and oils.......................................... 380
capacities........................................... 378
front seat............................................. 227
filter..................................................... 333 Fog lamps
Electric parking brake.............................. 137 oil grade.............................................. 378 rear........................................................ 91
low battery voltage............................. 137
Engine specifications............................... 377 Foot brake............................................... 133
releasing automatically....................... 138
releasing manually.............................. 138 Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's FOUR-C – Active chassis........................ 224
manual....................................................... 12 FSC, environmental labelling..................... 12
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 324 Error messages Fuel.......................................................... 296
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160 fuel consumption................................ 382
Emergency puncture repair..................... 325
Driver Alert Control............................. 180 fuel economy...................................... 323
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 298 Lane Departure Warning..................... 183 fuel filter.............................................. 297
Engine see Messages and symbols....... 139, 160
Fuse box.................................................. 353
overheating......................................... 305 Error messages in BLIS........................... 193 glovebox............................................. 358
starting................................................ 114
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 164 Fuses....................................................... 353
Engine block heater
ERS - Remote Start................................. 115 box in cargo area................................ 361
fuel-driven........................................... 218
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 212 changing............................................. 353
Engine braking, automatic....................... 135 cold zone............................................ 362
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
general................................................ 353
External dimensions................................ 374
405
relay/fuse box in engine compartment 354 H Hill Descent Control................................. 135

Start/Stop........................................... 362 HomeLink .............................................. 141
Fuse table Handbrake............................................... 137
Home safe lighting..................................... 94
fuses in engine compartment............. 355 Hazard warning flashers............................ 92
Hoot........................................................... 85
HDC......................................................... 135
11 Horn........................................................... 85
Headlamp levelling.................................... 86
G Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 94
Gearbox................................................... 120 Headlamp pattern adjustment I
automatic............................................ 121 Active Bending Lights .......................... 95
manual................................................ 120 Headlamps............................................... 339 IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 209
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 123 Headphones IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 26
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- battery replacement............................ 282 Ignition keys............................................... 78
gagement................................................. 123 wireless............................................... 281 Immobiliser................................................ 46
Geartronic................................................ 122 Headphones socket................. 237, 280, 282 Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 49
Glass Head restraint Inflatable curtain........................................ 26
laminated/reinforced........................... 101 centre seat, rear.................................... 82
Information button, PCC............................ 49
Global opening........................................ 208 lowering.......................................... 83, 84
Information displays.................................. 71
Glovebox................................................. 226 Heated washer nozzles.............................. 99
Infotainment system ............................... 232
locking.................................................. 57 Heating.................................................... 214
menus ................................................ 236
Gross vehicle weight............................... 374 rearview and door mirrors.................. 104
overview ............................................. 233
rear window........................................ 104
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 120 source buttons ................................... 233
seats................................................... 213
voice control....................................... 270
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 101
Inlaid mats............................................... 227
High engine temperature......................... 305
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 86
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 99
406
Instrument overview Key positions............................................. 78 Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 339

left-hand drive....................................... 68 cargo area........................................... 343
right-hand drive.................................... 70 dipped beam halogen......................... 340
Instruments and controls........................... 68 L direction indicators.............................
main beam, Xenon lamp.....................
341
341
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 92
Labels...................................................... 372 main beam halogen............................ 341
11
Interior rearview mirror............................. 105 number plate lighting.......................... 343
Laminated glass....................................... 101
automatic dimming............................. 105 side marker lamps.............................. 342
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 339
Intermittent wiping..................................... 98 vanity mirror........................................ 344
Lane Departure Control........................... 182
iPod, connection................................... 255 Light switches............................................ 86
Laser sensor................................................ 9
Loading
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 366 cargo area........................................... 299
J Lighting.................................................... 339 general................................................ 299
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 90 mounting points.................................. 300
Jack......................................................... 320 approach light, duration................. 48, 94 roof load............................................. 299
automatic lighting, passenger compart- Lock confirmation ..................................... 46
ment...................................................... 93
Locking/unlocking
K bulbs, specifications........................... 344
inside.................................................... 56
controls................................................. 92
tailgate.................................................. 57
Kerb weight.............................................. 374 display lighting...................................... 86
headlamp levelling................................ 86 Locks
Key............................................................. 46
home safe lighting................................ 94 automatic locking................................. 56
Key blade................................................... 50 locking.................................................. 56
in passenger compartment................... 92
Keyless drive...................................... 53, 114 instrument lighting................................ 86 unlocking.............................................. 56
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 53, 114 main/dipped beam............................... 87 Lubricants................................................ 380
Keypad in the steering position/parking lamps......................... 91 Lubricants, capacities.............................. 380
wheel................................. 85, 150, 201, 234 rear fog lamp........................................ 91
tunnel detection.................................... 90
407
M Messages and symbols Mood lighting............................................. 94

Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160 MY CAR................................................... 200
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 87 Collision Warning with Auto
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 88 Brake.......................................... 168, 176
O
Distance Alert..................................... 164
Maintenance
Driver Alert Control............................. 180
11 rustproofing........................................ 366
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183 Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 378
Making calls............................................. 263
Messages in BLIS.................................... 193 Oil level low.............................................. 333
Manual gearbox....................................... 120
Messages in the combined instrument Overheating............................................. 305
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 120
panel........................................................ 198
towing and recovery........................... 311 Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 12
Messages in the information display....... 147
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 122
Meters
Max. roof load ......................................... 374
Media, Bluetooth ................................... 258
fuel gauge............................................. 72
speedometer......................................... 72
P
media player ........................................... 251 tachometer........................................... 72 PACOS....................................................... 22
Memory function in seats.......................... 81 Microphone.............................................. 261 PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 236 Misting..................................................... 215 Paintwork
attending to the windows................... 208 colour code......................................... 368
Menu navigation RSE.............................. 286
condensation in headlamps............... 364 damage and touch-up........................ 368
Menus/functions...................................... 202 remove with the air vents................... 217
Panel lighting............................................. 86
Menus and messages.............................. 198 timer function...................................... 215
Panic function............................................ 48
Menu structures RSE....................... 286, 287 Mobile phone
connect............................................... 262 Panorama roof
Menu system MY CAR............................ 200
handsfree............................................ 261 curtain................................................. 107
register phone..................................... 262 opening and closing........................... 107
voice control....................................... 270 ventilation position.............................. 108
408
Park assist camera.................................. 188 register phone..................................... 262 Rear bulbs

Parking assistance................................... 185 voice control....................................... 270 location............................................... 342
parking assistance sensors................ 187 Polishing.................................................. 365 Rear control panel
Parking brake........................................... 137 Position/parking lamps.............................. 91 audio system...................................... 237
Parking heater.......................................... 218 Power panorama roof.............................. 107 Rear-seat entertainment.......................... 280
11
battery and fuel................................... 218 Power seat................................................. 81 Rear TV screens...................................... 280
parking on a hill.................................. 218 Rearview and door mirrors
Powershift gearbox.......................... 124, 311
time setting......................................... 220 compass............................................. 106
Power windows....................................... 101
Passenger compartment......................... 225 door.................................................... 103
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 320 electrically retractable......................... 104
Passenger compartment filter................. 208
heating................................................ 104
Passenger compartment heater
interior................................................. 105
Q
fuel-driven........................................... 218
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 104
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 47 Queue Assist............................................ 156 Recirculation............................................ 215
range............................................... 48, 49 Queue Assistant....................................... 156 Recommendations during driving............ 292
Pedestrian protection.............................. 170 Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Petrol grade............................................. 296 Recovery.................................................. 313
Phone R Refrigerant............................................... 338
connect............................................... 262 Refuelling................................................. 295
handsfree............................................ 261 Radar sensor........................................... 152
fuel cap............................................... 295
incoming calls..................................... 263 limitations........................................... 158
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 295
making calls........................................ 263 Radio ...................................................... 244 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 295
phone book......................................... 265 AM/FM ............................................... 244 refuelling............................................. 295
phone book, shortcut......................... 265 DAB ................................................... 248
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 353
receiving a call.................................... 264 Rain sensor................................................ 98
409
Remote control ....................................... 278 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system... 280 Set time interval....................................... 162
battery replacement ........................... 279 Rustproofing............................................ 366 Side airbags............................................... 24
Remote control, HomeLink Signal input, external....................... 233, 255
programmable ................................... 141
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Remote control key................................... 46 S Soot filter................................................. 298
11 battery replacement.............................. 51
detachable key blade........................... 50 Safety grille.............................................. 303 Soot filter full............................................ 298
functions............................................... 47 Safety mode.............................................. 31 Spare wheel............................................. 320
range..................................................... 48 Safety net................................................. 302 temporary spare................................. 320
Remote control key system, type appro- Seat, see Seats.......................................... 80 Spin control............................................. 146
val............................................................ 387 Spin control function............................... 146
Seatbelt
Remote Start - ERS................................. 115 rear seat................................................ 17 Stability and traction control system....... 146
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 104 seatbelt tensioner................................. 18 Stability system....................................... 146
Resetting the power windows................. 103 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17 Stains....................................................... 366
Retractable power door mirrors............... 104 Seatbelts.................................................... 16 Start assistance....................................... 119
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 121 Seats.......................................................... 80 Steering force, speed related.................. 224
Rims head restraints, rear.............................. 82
Steering force level, see Steering force... 224
cleaning.............................................. 365 heating................................................ 213
lowering the front backrest................... 80 Steering lock............................................ 115
Road sign information............................. 148
lowering the rear backrest.................... 83 Steering wheel........................................... 85
Roll-over protection................................... 29 power seats.......................................... 81 keypad.......................... 85, 150, 201, 234
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 374 Securing loads (Loading)......................... 300 keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 154
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 29 steering wheel adjustment.................... 85
Sensus....................................................... 77
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll- Stone chips and scratches...................... 368
Service position....................................... 345
over protection).......................................... 29 Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
Service programme................................. 332
ment......................................................... 225
410
Surround.......................................... 232, 239 Towbar TV............................................................. 274

Symbols................................................... 147 detachable, attachment ..................... 308 Type approval, remote control key sys-
indicator symbols................................. 72 detachable, removal .......................... 309 tem........................................................... 387
warning symbols................................... 72 Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 306 Type designation..................................... 372
Symbols and messages Towing..................................................... 311 Tyres
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 160 towing eye.......................................... 312 11
direction of rotation............................ 316
Collision Warning with Auto Towing capacity....................................... 374 driving characteristics......................... 316
Brake.......................................... 168, 176 maintenance....................................... 316
Towing equipment................................... 306
Distance Alert..................................... 164 pressure.............................................. 323
specifications...................................... 307
Driver Alert Control............................. 180 puncture repair................................... 325
Lane Departure Warning..................... 183 Towing eye.............................................. 312
specifications...................................... 319
Trailer....................................................... 305 speed ratings...................................... 319
cable................................................... 305 tread wear indicators.......................... 317
T driving with a trailer............................ 305 winter tyres......................................... 318
snaking............................................... 310
Tailgate...................................................... 58 Trailer stability assist .............................. 146
locking/unlocking.................................. 57
open...................................................... 59
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 310 U
Transmission............................................ 120
Temperature Unlocking
actual temperature............................. 208 Transponder............................................ 101 from the inside...................................... 56
Temperature control................................ 214 Trip computer.......................................... 222 from the outside................................... 56
Timer........................................................ 215 Trip meter.................................................. 75 USB, connection...................................... 255
Tools........................................................ 320 Troubleshooting

Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 159
Total airing function........................... 57, 208
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 146, 310
Tunnel detection........................................ 90
411
V Warning symbols....................................... 72 Windscreen washing.................................. 99

Warning triangle....................................... 324 Windscreen wipers.................................... 98
Vanity mirror...................................... 93, 227 rain sensor............................................ 98
Washer fluid, filling................................... 347
Ventilation................................................ 209 Winter driving........................................... 293
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 99
Vibration damper..................................... 306 Winter tyres.............................................. 318
Washers
11
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 270 rear window.......................................... 99 Wiper blades............................................ 345
Volvo Sensus............................................. 77 washer fluid, filling.............................. 347 changing............................................. 345
windscreen........................................... 99 cleaning.............................................. 346
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 101 replacing, rear window....................... 346
W Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 365
service position................................... 345
Wipers and washing.................................. 98
Warning lamp Waxing..................................................... 365
Wireless headphones.............................. 281
adaptive cruise control....................... 152 Weights
collision warning system.................... 173 kerb weight......................................... 374
stability and traction control system. . 146 Wheels
Warning lamps changing............................................. 320
airbags SRS.......................................... 74 installation........................................... 321
alternator not charging......................... 74 rims..................................................... 317
fault in brake system............................ 74 snow chains........................................ 318
low oil pressure..................................... 74 spare wheel........................................ 320
parking brake applied........................... 74 Wheels and tyres..................................... 316
seatbelt reminder.................................. 74
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
warning................................................. 74
WHIPS
Warning sound
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
collision warning system.................... 173
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 101
412
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51 &OHMJTI "5 1SJOUFEJO4XFEFO (zUFCPSH $PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO

XC60 Owners Manual MY13 en-GB TP 15260

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 Owners Manual MY13 en-GB TP 15260

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 Owners Manual MY13 en-GB TP 15260

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 OWNERS MANUAL L:7:9>I>DC

DEAR VOLVO OWNER

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ferent equipment depending on adaptations instead of numbers for referral.

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

warning is ignored, may result in serious per- Information Procedure lists

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Laser sensor exception of deviations in accordance with WARNING

The upper label in the figure describes the laser

• The laser sensor's connector must be

For more information on the laser sensor, see

Information on the Internet

Volvo and the environment

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11

Volvo and the environment

12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING

It is therefore possible that only one (or

01 Activating/deactivating the airbag*

Key switch off - PACOS* WARNING Activating/deactivating

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

WARNING Activated airbag Deactivated airbag

when the airbag is activated. This applies to

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)

Side airbag WARNING Location

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

Properties of the seat

Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS 01

01 When the systems deploy

Children should sit comfortably and NOTE WARNING

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

WARNING WARNING Label Airbag

Recommended child seats2

Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat

Group 1 Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,

Raising the two-stage booster cushion

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushion

If the instructions regarding the two-stage

WARNING NOTE NOTE

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA

Upper mounting points for child seats NOTE

For detailed information on how the child seat

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key/key blade

General Loss of a remote control key Indicator for locking/unlocking

1 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.